Volvo Automobile VHD User Manual

OPERATOR’SMANUAL  
VHD  
New Roads.TM  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
General Information ............................. 1  
Miscellaneous Switches .................... 107  
Information For the Owner ................... 1  
General Safety Information .................. 3  
Modifications to Vehicle ....................... 7  
Exhaust and Noise Emissions ............... 8  
Vehicle Data ........................................ 16  
Graphic Display ................................. 108  
Graphic Display Overview ............... 108  
Graphic Display Controls ................. 109  
Graphic Display Telltales .................. 111  
Information and Stop Messages ....... 112  
Information Telltale ........................... 113  
Stop Telltale ...................................... 120  
Vehicle Access ...................................... 19  
Cab Doors and Door Lock ................. 19  
Cab Entry and Exit ............................. 21  
Hood .................................................... 26  
Acknowledge Information and Stop  
Messages ........................................... 124  
Main Menu: Set-Up Mode ............... 126  
Main Menu: System Diagnostic ....... 131  
Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Mainte-  
nance ..................................................... 28  
Main Menu: Data Log Mode (Volvo  
Engine Only) ..................................... 146  
General ................................................ 28  
Pre-Trip Inspection Quick List ........... 29  
Daily Maintenance .............................. 41  
Main Menu: Password Input ............ 152  
Main Menu: Gauge ........................... 153  
Main Menu: Fuel Economy (option) 157  
Main Menu: Time/Distance .............. 159  
Main Menu: FAULTS? ..................... 164  
Additional Safety Features ................. 46  
Safety Belts ......................................... 46  
SRS Airbag ......................................... 55  
Safety Equipment ................................ 62  
VORAD Collision Warning System ... 63  
Heating and Air Conditioning ......... 168  
General .............................................. 168  
Climate Unit Main Control Panel .... 169  
Cab Ventilation .................................. 177  
Cab Air Filter .................................... 178  
A/C Diagnostic Module .................... 179  
Instruments and Controls ................... 64  
Dash Overview .................................... 64  
Instrument Cluster Overview .............. 65  
Telltale Overview ................................ 66  
Graphic Display Telltale Overview .... 67  
Left Instrument Section ...................... 68  
Main Instrument Section ..................... 76  
Right Instrument Section .................... 83  
Changing Telltale Bulbs In Cluster .... 89  
Steering Column Switches .................. 91  
Left Switch Cluster ............................. 94  
Driving Light Switches ....................... 98  
Right Switch Cluster ......................... 100  
Pneumatic Switch Cluster ................. 104  
Optional Switch Cluster .................... 106  
Seats ..................................................... 180  
General .............................................. 180  
National Standard Seat Adjustments 181  
Volvo Standard Seat Adjustments .... 182  
National Stationary Seat ................... 183  
Cab Interior ....................................... 184  
Interior/Reading Lights ..................... 184  
Communication and Entertainment 187  
Antennas ............................................ 187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Stereo/Radio ...................................... 188  
Communication Equipment .............. 189  
General .............................................. 256  
Axles and Wheels ............................... 258  
Axles .................................................. 258  
Wheels ............................................... 261  
Fuel Economy Driving ...................... 190  
Fuel Economy ................................... 190  
Engine Start and Operation ............. 197  
Starting the Engine ........................... 197  
Cold Weather Start and Operation ... 202  
Engine Operation .............................. 209  
Cruise Control ................................... 218  
Fuel Tank(s) ...................................... 220  
Fifth Wheel Instructions ................... 264  
Fifth Wheel General Information ..... 264  
Fifth Wheel ....................................... 265  
Fifth Wheel Slider (option) .............. 267  
Unlocking the Fifth Wheel ............... 268  
Trailer Coupling Procedures ............. 270  
Trailer Uncoupling Procedures ......... 275  
Operating the Fifth Wheel Slider ..... 280  
Clutch and Transmission .................. 222  
Clutch ................................................ 222  
Emergency Information .................... 282  
Brakes ................................................. 223  
Towing Procedure ............................. 282  
Brakes ................................................ 223  
Service Information ........................... 287  
Electrical System ............................... 244  
Service Assistance and Manuals ...... 287  
Electrical System ............................... 244  
Power Steering ................................... 256  
Index .................................................... 289  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warning Label Information  
IMPORTANT  
Before driving this vehicle, be certain that you have read and that  
you fully understand each and every step of the driving and han-  
dling information in this Operator’s Manual. Be certain that you  
fully understand and follow all safety warnings. It is extremely im-  
portant that this information is read and understood before the  
vehicle is operated.  
IT IS IMPORTANT THAT THE FOLLOW-  
ING INFORMATION CONCERNING  
LABELS BE READ, UNDERSTOOD  
AND ALWAYS FOLLOWED.  
NOTE! A note defines an operating proce-  
dure, practice, condition, etc., which is  
essential to proper operation of the vehicle.  
The following types of labels are used  
throughout this manual:  
CAUTION  
A caution label directs the operator’s  
attention to unsafe practices where per-  
sonal injury is not likely but property  
damage could occur. The caution label is  
in black type on a white background  
with a black border.  
WARNING  
A warning label directs the operator’s  
attention to unsafe practices which could  
result in personal injury or severe dam-  
age to the vehicle. The warning label is  
in black type on a gray background  
with a black border.  
A danger label directs the operator’s at-  
tention to unsafe practices which could  
result in serious personal injury or death.  
The caution label is in white type on a  
black background with a black border.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Information  
1
Information For the Owner  
If there are questions on the maintenance  
and performance of your vehicle, please  
discuss them with your Volvo Truck dealer.  
Your authorized dealer is required to have  
trained mechanics, special tools and spare  
parts to fully service your vehicle. If  
necessary, your dealer will contact the man-  
ufacturer for any assistance.  
Various truck warranty coverage plans, con-  
tingent on application and weight class, are  
available. Please contact an authorized  
Volvo Truck Dealer for complete details.  
Replacement warranty certificates for Volvo  
Trucks are available from Volvo dealers.  
For trucks placed in service after August 1,  
2000 and operating in the USA and  
In addition to this Operator’s Manual, there  
may be additional instruction/operator’s  
manuals supplied by component manufac-  
turers. These manuals are placed in the  
Owner’s Package and placed in the cab. Be  
sure to read all the manuals thoroughly be-  
fore operating the vehicle.  
Canada, Volvo dealers can print copies of  
the Standard Truck Warranty Certificate  
and the Premium (Purchased) Truck Cover-  
age Certificate. Copies are available in  
either English or Canadian French at the  
dealer communication system (DCS) web-  
site. Look in the Service/Warranty folder.  
Also, various safety labels may be placed  
on components by the component manufac-  
turer. Be sure to read and follow these  
labels to prevent damage to the vehicle,  
personal injury or even death.  
NOTE! Federal law requires manufacturers  
to notify owners of its products in the event  
of a non-compliance to a Federal Motor  
Vehicle Safety Standard or if a safety re-  
lated defect is discovered. If you are not  
the original owner of this vehicle, please  
notify us about the change in ownership at  
the address below or through an authorized  
Volvo Truck dealer. This is the only way  
we will be able to contact you if necessary.  
Information in this manual refers to Volvo  
components and Volvo drivetrain. Informa-  
tion concerning non-Volvo engines and/or  
drivetrains can be obtained by contacting  
the respective manufacturer.  
Establish a Preventive Maintenance Pro-  
gram with the help of your local Volvo  
Truck dealer. A Preventive Maintenance  
Program makes it possible to maximize the  
amount of time your vehicle is up and run-  
ning, resulting in longer component life.  
This makes for a safer vehicle by reducing  
any mechanical failures due to poor mainte-  
nance practices.  
Volvo Trucks North America, Inc.  
Att: Vehicle Registration dept.  
P. O. Box 26115  
Greensboro, NC 27402–6115  
United States of America  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2
General Information  
Do Not Remove this manual from the ve-  
hicle. It contains important operational and  
safety information that is needed by all  
drivers and owners of this vehicle.  
This Operator’s Manual covers Volvo  
VHD-series vehicles manufactured by  
Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. with any  
of the following designations:  
VHD42 VHD64 VHD84 VHD104  
VHD124 VHD42T VHD64T VHD84T  
T=tractor, F=forward position axle  
B=back position axle  
W8002807  
Explanation: The first number after the  
model designation (4, 6, 8, 10 or 12) repre-  
sents the total number of wheels (hubs) per  
vehicle. The last number (2 or 4) represents  
the number of wheels (hubs) that drive the  
vehicle.  
Back position axle  
This manual, together with manuals for  
specific components, for example, Volvo  
engine, Cummins engine, Eaton transmis-  
sion, etc., contain important information for  
you to be able to operate this vehicle  
safely. They contain advice and instructions  
which will enable you to get the operating  
economy and performance that you expect  
from this quality vehicle.  
All information, illustrations and specifica-  
tions contained in this manual are based  
upon the latest product information avail-  
able at the time of publication. If any  
W0001920  
Forward position axle  
questions arise concerning the current sta-  
tus of Federal or state laws, the appropriate  
Federal or state agency should be contacted.  
Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. reserves  
the right to make changes at any time or to  
change specifications or design without no-  
tice and without incurring obligation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Information  
3
General Safety Information  
Operating the Vehicle  
Every vehicle, including heavy duty vehi-  
cles, has blind spots. The size of blind  
spots varies from driver to driver and from  
situation to situation. As a skilled, profes-  
sional driver, you are in the best position to  
avoid accidents in turns, lane changes or  
other maneuvers. Volvo Trucks North  
America, Inc. provides standard equipment  
(such as cabs, windshields, window sizes  
and mirrors), preferred by most owners and  
drivers under most conditions and in most  
applications.  
Never try to operate or work on this  
vehicle while under the influence of al-  
cohol. Your reflexes can be affected by  
even a small amount of alcohol. Drink-  
ing and operating this vehicle can lead  
to an accident, causing serious personal  
injury or death.  
However, due to differences in the size of  
drivers, their seating positions, the way that  
they use and operate their vehicles, per-  
sonal preferences and other factors, no  
combination of mirrors and other visibility  
enhancement devices will eliminate all  
blind spots in every situation.  
The safe operation of this vehicle is up to  
you. Because of your special preferences,  
needs and circumstances, you may want to  
add extra mirrors and/or other visibility en-  
hancement devices. If so, you should  
contact an authorized Volvo Truck dealer to  
obtain those parts which best fit your own  
personal needs and preferences.  
WARNING  
All items within the cab must be secured  
before the vehicle is set in motion. This  
includes, but is not limited to, drinks,  
clothes, books, televisions, etc. In the  
event of a collision, loose items could  
fly around inside the cab. This could  
cause personal injury.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
General Information  
Operating In Bobtail Mode  
Tractors are equipped with a bobtail air  
brake proportioning valve which automati-  
cally redistributes the braking force between  
front and rear axles when not hooked up to  
a semitrailer (bobtail operation).  
When operating in bobtail mode, the rear  
brake chambers receive reduced or propor-  
tional brake air pressure. When the tractor  
is towing a trailer, the rear brake chambers  
will receive full (normal) brake pressure.  
NOTE! When operating bobtail, be certain  
that glad hands, trailer air hoses, electrical  
cable and connectors are properly stowed  
and secure. Do not allow them to rub or  
chafe on other components.  
WARNING  
When operating bobtail, the brake  
system on the vehicle reduces the possi-  
bility of rear wheel brake lockup, except  
on full pedal application. When bobtail-  
ing, be certain that adequate pedal  
pressure is applied. There is no need to  
reduce pedal effort. Failure to do so may  
result in increased stopping distances.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Information  
5
Do Not Overload  
This vehicle has been designed and assem-  
bled for a maximum gross vehicle weight  
rating (GVWR) and a maximum front and  
rear axle weights rating (FAWR and  
RAWR). The actual rating for this vehicle  
can be found on the label attached to the  
door frame on the driver’s side. If any of  
these three ratings is exceeded and over-  
loading occurs, instability, poor handling,  
failure of parts and accelerated wear can  
occur.  
Under no circumstances should the pub-  
lished GVWR, FAWR, and/or RAWR be  
exceeded. Failure to observe these pre-  
cautions can lead to the loss of vehicle  
control, resulting in a crash causing seri-  
ous personal injury or death.  
W0001210  
Do not exceed the load rating of the  
tires or the vehicle weight ratings. Over-  
loading may result in tire failure causing  
loss of vehicle control, leading to an ac-  
cident resulting in severe personal injury  
or death.  
Operating  
Before driving this vehicle, locate the in-  
struments and controls, and become  
thoroughly familiar with their operation.  
After starting and when driving, always  
check to make sure that the instrument  
readings are normal.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
General Information  
Reporting Safety Defects  
USA  
The National Highway Traffic Safety Ad-  
ministration (NHTSA) and Volvo Trucks  
North America, Inc. should be informed  
immediately if you believe that the vehicle  
has a defect that could cause a crash, injury  
or death.  
Contact NHTSA by calling the Auto Safety  
Hotline at 1 (800) 424–9393 (or 366–0123  
in the Washington, DC area) or by writing  
to: NHTSA, U. S. Department of Trans-  
portation, Washington, DC 20590.  
1 (800) 424-9393  
1 (905) 795-1555  
01 (800) 90 94 900  
Canada  
Refer consumer complaints to Volvo Trucks  
Canada, Inc. or to the Transport Canada -  
Department of Public Complaints, Recalls  
and Investigations.  
Mexico  
Volvo Trucks of Mexico, S.A. de C.V.  
should be informed immediately if you be-  
lieve the vehicle has a defect that could  
cause a crash, injury or death. Contact  
Volvo Trucks de Mexico by calling or by  
writing to: Volvo Trucks de Mexico, S.A.  
de C.V., Prol. Paseo de la Reforma 600,  
1er. Piso — 121, Col. Santa Fe Peña  
Blanca, C.P. 01210, México, D.F.  
NOTE! For a listing of other contacts for  
information or help, see page 287.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Information  
7
Modifications to Vehicle  
Chassis Frame  
Frame side rails are heat treated. No weld-  
ing is permitted because structural failure  
may result. Do not drill through either top  
or bottom flanges. A warning label is also  
attached to the frame for information.  
Drilling is permitted in the frame web in  
accordance with a specified hole spacing  
pattern. Consult a Volvo Truck dealer to  
obtain approved hole spacing dimensions or  
refer to the Frame Rail and Cross Member  
Service Manual.  
W7001174  
Frame rail and cross member nuts and bolts  
should be checked periodically and tight-  
ened to the specified torque if necessary.  
WARNING  
Do not weld on any part of the frame or  
drill holes in the top or bottom flanges.  
Serious structural damage could occur.  
Frame Alterations  
Under no circumstances can the frame be  
cut and an extension piece added to in-  
crease the wheelbase. The only alteration  
allowed is wheel base shortening, where  
the only change in the frame rail is a new  
hole pattern drilled for the new location of  
the rear suspension.  
Welding In Vehicle  
Do not weld anywhere in or on the vehicle  
before disconnecting batteries, all electronic  
control units (ECU) and instrument cluster.  
See page 249 for more information. Do not  
use oxy/acetylene welding to repair cab  
panels. Refer to the service manuals for  
specific information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
General Information  
Exhaust and Noise Emissions  
General  
USA  
The Federal Clean Air Act, Section 203 (a)  
(3), states the following concerning the re-  
moval of air pollution control devices or  
modification of a certified engine to a non-  
certified configuration:  
any manufacturer or dealer knowingly to  
remove or render inoperative any such de-  
sign after sale and delivery to the ultimate  
purchaser.”  
Specifically, please note that no person may  
make such changes prior to the sale and  
delivery of the vehicle to the ultimate pur-  
chaser, and, in addition, no manufacturer or  
dealer may take such action after sale and  
delivery of the vehicle to the ultimate pur-  
chaser. The law provides a penalty of up to  
$10, 000 for each violation.  
“The following acts and the causing thereof  
are prohibited:  
(3) For any person to remove or render in-  
operative any device or element of design  
installed on or in a motor vehicle or motor  
vehicle engine in compliance with regula-  
tions under this part prior to its sale and  
delivery to the ultimate purchaser, or for  
Canada  
Mexico  
The same conditions that apply in the USA  
apply to Canada, with one exception. After  
the vehicle is sold to a retail customer, that  
is, the end user, the jurisdiction controlling  
the emission control devices becomes the  
province in which the vehicle is licensed.  
No changes should be made that render any  
or all of the devices inoperative.  
The same conditions that apply in the USA  
apply to Mexico. Refer to the Mexican  
Federal Law for Emission Control which  
adheres to EPA regulations. No changes  
should be made that render any or all of  
the emissions control devices inoperative.  
Should the owner/operator wish to make  
any changes to the emission control de-  
vices, check with the state authority before  
making any such changes.  
Should the owner/operator wish to make  
any changes to the emission control de-  
vices, check with the provincial authority  
before making any such changes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Information  
9
California Emission Control Warranty Statement  
YOUR WARRANTY RIGHTS AND OBLIGATIONS  
The California Air Resources Board and Volvo Trucks North America , Inc. (VTNA) are  
pleased to explain the emission control system warranty on your vehicle. In California,  
new motor vehicles must be designed, built and equipped to meet the State’s stringent  
anti-smog standards. Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. must warrant the emission control  
system on your vehicle for the periods of time listed listed below provided there has been  
no abuse, neglect or improper maintenance of your vehicle.  
Your emission control system may include parts such as carburetor or fuel injection system  
and engine computer. Also included may be hoses, belts, connectors and other emission-  
related assemblies.  
Where a warrantable condition exists, Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. will repair your  
vehicle at no cost to you including diagnosis, parts and labor.  
MANUFACTURER’S WARRANTY COVERAGE  
This warranty is applicable for a period of five years, 100 000 miles or 3 000 hours of op-  
eration, whichever first occurs. If an emission-related part of your vehicle is defective, the  
part will be repaired or replaced by Volvo Trucks North America, Inc.  
This is your emission control system DEFECTS WARRANTY.  
OWNER’S WARRANTY RESPONSIBILITIES  
As the vehicle owner, you are responsible for the performance of the required maintenance  
listed in your owner’s manual. Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. recommends that you re-  
tain all receipts covering maintenance on your truck but Volvo Trucks North America, Inc.  
cannot deny warranty solely for the lack of receipts or for your failure to ensure the per-  
formance of all scheduled maintenance.  
You are responsible for presenting your vehicle to a Volvo Trucks North America, Inc.  
dealer as soon as a problem exists. The warranty repairs should be completed in a reason-  
able amount of time, not to exceed 30 days.  
As the vehicle owner, you should also be aware that Volvo Trucks North America, Inc.  
may deny you warranty coverage if your vehicle or a part has failed due to abuse, neglect,  
improper maintenance or unapproved modifications.  
If you have any questions regarding your warranty rights and responsibilities, you should  
contact Volvo Trucks North America, Inc., Warranty Administration, (336) 393-2000 or  
the California Air Resources Board at 9480 Telstar Avenue, El Monte, CA 91731.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10 General Information  
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY  
Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. WARRANTS TO THE ORIGINAL OWNER, AND  
EACH SUBSEQUENT OWNER, OF A NEW TRUCK POWERED BY A VOLVO  
DIESEL ENGINE THAT THE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM OF YOUR TRUCK:  
1
Is designed, built and equipped so as to conform at the time of sale to all regulations  
of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency and the California California Air Re-  
sources Board applicable at the time of the manufacture; and  
2
Is free from defects in material and workmanship which will cause the emission con-  
trol components not to function as designed for a period of use of 5 years or 100 000  
miles or 3 000 hours of engine operation, whichever comes first.  
The 5 years/100 000 miles/3 000 hour warranty period shall begin on the date the vehicle  
is first delivered to the first retail purchaser or if the vehicle is placed in service as a  
demonstrator company vehicle prior to the sale at retail, on the date the vehicle is the first  
placed in service.  
The emission control system of your new Volvo engine was designed, built and tested us-  
ing genuine Volvo parts, and the engine is certified as being in conformity with Federal  
and California emission control regulations. Accordingly, it is recommended that any re-  
placement parts used for maintenance, replacement or repair without invalidating this  
warranty; the cost of such services or or parts, however, will not be covered under the war-  
ranty except in an emergency situation. A part not being available or a repair not being  
completed within 30 days also constitutes an emergency.  
Use of replacement parts which are not of equivalent quality may impair the effectiveness  
of emission control systems. If other than Volvo parts are used for maintenance, owner  
should obtain assurances that suck parts are warranted by their manufacturer to be equiva-  
lent to genuine Volvo parts. However, the use of other than Volvo replacement parts does  
not invalidate the warranty on other components, unless such parts cause damage to war-  
ranted parts.  
Repairs and service covered by the warranty will be performed by an authorized Volvo  
Trucks North America, Inc. dealer at his place of business with no charge for parts or la-  
bor (including diagnosis) using Volvo parts for the emission control system, that requires  
replacement and is covered by the warranty and found defective. In case of an emergency,  
where an authorized Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. dealer is not available, repairs may  
be performed at any available service establishment or by the owner, using any equivalent  
replacement parts and Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. will reimburse the owner for such  
repairs (including diagnosis) not to exceed Volvo Trucks North America, Inc’s suggested  
retail retail price for the warranted parts and the labor rate appropriate for the geographical  
area and the tasks performed.  
Replaced parts and paid invoices must be presented to a Volvo Trucks North America, Inc.  
dealer for reimbursement.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Information 11  
The emissions control parts covered by this Emission Control System Warranty are listed  
under "What Is Covered by the Emissions Warranty." You are responsible for the perfor-  
mance of all required maintenance on your new Volvo engine, including maintenance or  
repairs needed due to severe operating conditions. Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. will  
not deny a warranty claim solely because you have no record of maintenance. However,  
Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. may deny a warranty claim if your failure to perform  
required maintenance resulted in the failure of a warranted part. Receipts covering the  
performance of regular maintenance should be retained in the event questions arise con-  
cerning maintenance. The receipts should be transferred to each subsequent owner of the  
vehicle with the emission warranted engine.  
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE  
Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. wishes to help to assure that the Emission Control Sys-  
tem Warranty is properly administered. In the event that you do not receive the warranty  
service to which you believe you are entitled under the Emission Control System Warranty,  
you should contact Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. Warranty Administration, (336) 393-  
2000. The address and telephone number of each Regional Office is in your vehicle  
owner’s manual. If you need additional assistance or information concerning the Emission  
Control System Warranty, contact: Volvo Trucks North America, Inc., Warranty Adminis-  
tration, (336) 393-2000.  
WHAT IS NOT COVERED BY THE EMISSION WARRANTY  
This warranty does not cover:  
1
Malfunctions in any part caused by any of the following: misuse, abuse, improper  
adjustments unless performed by a Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. dealer, modifi-  
cations, alterations, tampering, disconnection, improper or inadequate maintenance, or  
use of fuels not recommended for the engine as described in the owner’s manual.  
Damage resulting from accident, acts of nature or other events beyond the control of  
Volvo Trucks North America, Inc.  
The replacement of expendable maintenance items such as filters, hoses, belts, oil,  
thermostat and coolant made in connection with scheduled maintenance services once  
these parts have been replaced. Any parts replaced under warranty before the first re-  
quired replacement point are warranted for the remainder of the warranty period.  
Replacement items which are not genuine Volvo parts or not authorized by Volvo  
Trucks North America, Inc.  
2
3
4
5
6
Loss of time, inconvenience, loss of use of vehicle or engine, or commercial loss.  
Any vehicle on which the odometer or hourmeter has been disconnected or the  
mileage (or hours) has been altered so the actual usage cannot be readily be deter-  
mined.  
7
Any vehicle registered and normally operated outside the United States.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 General Information  
WHAT IS COVERED BY THE EMISSION WARRANTY  
The following is a list of the items that are considered a part of the Emission Control Sys-  
tems and are covered by the Emission Warranty when installed as original equipment by  
Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. on vehicles which were built to conform to Environ-  
mental Protection Agency and California Air Resources Board regulations  
IMPORTANT - This may not include expendable maintenance items. Emission related  
parts requiring scheduled maintenance are warranted until their first scheduled replacement  
point.  
I. Fuel Injection System  
II. Air Induction System  
A. Intake Manifold  
B. Turbocharge System  
C. Charge Air Cooler (Intercooler)  
III. Exhaust Manifold  
IV. Miscellaneous Items Used in Above Systems  
A. Hose, clamps, fittings and tubing  
B. Pulleys, belts and idlers  
C. Vacuum, temperature, and time sensitive valves and switches  
D. Mounting hardware, sealing gaskets and PVC (if applicable)  
THIS CALIFORNIA EMISSION CONTROL WARRANTY STATEMENT IN NO WAY  
REPLACES, MODIFIES, ALTERS OR SUPERSEDES THE TRUCK WARRANTY CER-  
TIFICATE, ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS, AND ITS  
LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS.  
BE CERTAIN YOU READ AND UNDERSTAND ALL WARRANTIES WHICH  
ACCOMPANIED YOUR VEHICLE.  
NOTE! Warranty coverage is subject to  
change without notice. Contact your Volvo  
Truck dealer for the current warranty  
statement.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Information 13  
Noise Emissions  
Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. warrants  
to the first person who purchases this vehi-  
cle for purposes other than resale and to  
each subsequent purchaser, that this vehicle  
as manufactured by Volvo Trucks North  
America, Inc. was designed, built and  
equipped to conform, at the time it left the  
control of Volvo Trucks North America,  
Inc., with all applicable U.S. EPA Noise  
Control Regulations.  
This warranty covers this vehicle as de-  
signed, built and equipped by Volvo Trucks  
North America, Inc., and is not limited to  
any particular part, component or system of  
the vehicle manufactured by Volvo Trucks  
North America, Inc. Defects in design, as-  
sembly or in any part, component or system  
of the vehicle as manufactured by Volvo  
Trucks North America, Inc., which, at the  
time it left the control of Volvo Trucks  
North America, Inc. caused noise emissions  
to exceed Federal standards, are covered by  
this warranty for the life of the vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14 General Information  
Tampering with Noise Control System  
Federal law prohibits the following acts or  
the causing thereof:  
(1) The removal or rendering inoperative by  
any person, other than for purposes of  
maintenance, repair, or replacement, of any  
device or element of design incorporated  
into any new vehicle for the purpose of  
noise control prior to its sale or delivery to  
the ultimate purchaser or while it is in use;  
or  
(2) the use of the vehicle after such device  
or element of design has been removed or  
rendered inoperative by any person.  
Among those acts presumed to constitute  
tampering are the acts listed below:  
Air Intake System  
Removing or rendering inoperative the air  
cleaner or intake piping.  
Engine Cooling Fan  
Removing or rendering inoperative the fan  
clutch.  
Removing the fan shroud.  
Engine  
Removing or altering engine speed pro-  
gramming so as to allow engine speed to  
exceed manufacturer’s specifications.  
Modifying the parameters of the Engine  
Electronic Control Unit.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Information 15  
Fuel System  
Removing or altering engine speed pro-  
gramming so as to allow engine speed to  
exceed manufacturer’s specifications.  
Inner Fender Shields and Cab Skirts  
Removing shields or skirts.  
Cutting away parts of shields, skirts or dam-  
aged or loose portions of shields or skirts.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16 General Information  
Vehicle Data  
Identification and Labels  
It is extremely important that the correct  
vehicle model and serial number are given  
whenever replacement parts or service liter-  
ature are ordered. Using these numbers, as  
well as giving the major component model  
and serial numbers, will prevent delay and  
errors in obtaining the correct material.  
Space is given on the rear inside cover of  
this manual for noting the main component  
model and serial numbers.  
The full 17–digit Vehicle Identification  
Number (VIN) is shown on the Vehicle  
Identification label located in the door  
opening on the driver’s side (see next  
page). The 8–digit chassis number is  
stamped into the right-hand frame rail un-  
derside and the left-hand frame rail topside,  
42 inches (1065 mm) back from the front  
edge of the frame rail. The use of this num-  
ber is very helpful when ordering parts for  
your vehicle.  
W0001732  
Vehicle Order  
The Vehicle Order is a complete and de-  
tailed record of all data pertaining to the  
assembly of the vehicle. It should be filed  
in the Owner’s office where it will be read-  
ily available for reference. Any changes  
made to the vehicle must become a part of  
the Vehicle Order and must comply with all  
applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety  
Standards.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General Information 17  
Identification and Certification Labels  
There are two labels that are located on the  
rear, lower face of the driver side door  
frame. These should be part of the vehicle  
at all times.  
The VIN is shown on the Vehicle Identifi-  
cation label. The VIN includes the vehicle  
make, model series, weight class, engine  
model, where the vehicle was built and the  
vehicle serial number. This label also  
shows the truck model designation, major  
component model and serial number, cab  
model and serial number, cab and chassis  
paint colors, and color numbers.  
On the upper part of the door frame is the  
Certification label showing the axle and  
load ratings for the vehicle as it was built.  
Do not exceed these ratings by overloading.  
NOTE! To deter tampering with the origi-  
nal build information, the information on  
the label will be destroyed if label is  
removed. If for any reason a label is dam-  
aged, contact your Volvo Truck dealer for a  
replacement.  
W0001210  
Noise Emission Control Label  
A Noise Emission Control label is located  
in the rear of the door frame. It is the  
Owner’s responsibility to maintain the vehi-  
cle so that it conforms to EPA regulations.  
Refer to page 14 for a listing on what con-  
stitutes tampering with the Noise Emissions  
Control.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18 General Information  
Components  
The Volvo D12 engine serial number is lo-  
cated on the rear, left side of the cylinder  
block.  
There is also a label on the engine elec-  
tronic control unit that shows the engine  
serial number.  
W0001529  
The Volvo D7 engine serial number is lo-  
cated on the rear, left side of the cylinder  
block.  
There is also a label on the rear valve cover  
that shows the engine serial number.  
W2002707  
The Volvo rear axle model and serial num-  
ber is located on the right side of the  
transfer gear housing on the tandem front  
axle. It is located on the left side of the dif-  
ferential housing on the tandem rear axle  
and on the right side of the single axle.  
W4000894  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vehicle Access 19  
Cab Doors and Door Lock  
The cab door is unlocked with the same  
key used for the ignition lock. Keys can be  
made to fit only one vehicle or all the vehi-  
cles in a fleet of Volvos. A tool for  
changing bulbs in the instrument cluster is  
included on the keychain.  
W0001231  
The key fits in the door lock either way.  
Insert the key and turn it 1/4 turn counter-  
clockwise to unlock or clockwise to lock  
the door.  
Key code on tag of keychain  
NOTE! The vehicle is delivered with 2  
identical keys. If more keys are needed,  
order them through your Volvo Truck au-  
thorized dealer. The keys are laser cut and  
require a special machine for copying,  
available through the dealer. Record the key  
code and keep it in a secure place. A new  
key can be made if the keys are lost.  
The door locks are mechanically or electri-  
cally operated. The lock is activated by  
either the key from the outside or the door  
lock handle from the inside. With mechani-  
cal locks, only one door can be  
locked/unlocked at a time. With electrical  
locks, both doors will be locked/unlocked  
by operating either the key or the inner  
door lock handle on either side.  
To lock either door from the inside, push  
the door lock handle forward. The handle  
will stay in place, indicating the door is  
locked. It can be unlocked without opening  
the door by moving the door lock handle to  
the middle position.  
No door can be locked while it is still  
open. The door must be closed for the lock  
to work. In the event of a power failure the  
electrical lock system reverts back to a me-  
chanically functioning system.  
W8001462  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
20 Vehicle Access  
The door has a position lock that enables  
the door to remain open in two different  
positions. An indented bar is holding the  
door at approximately 30 and in the fully  
open position at approximately 85 .  
To close the door from the inside, place the  
hand in the handhold and pull the door in.  
To lessen the chance of being thrown  
from the vehicle in case of an accident,  
always lock the door and wear the safety  
belt while driving. Failure to do so can  
cause serious personal injury or death if  
involved in an accident.  
W8001854  
CAUTION  
Do not shut the door by pushing on the  
door panel. Hard pushing may distort  
the metal in the door panel.  
To close the door from the outside, place  
the hand flat against the door lock area and  
push the door shut.  
W8001853  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vehicle Access 21  
Cab Entry and Exit  
General  
WARNING  
To avoid personal injury due to a slip  
and/or fall, observe all the guidelines ex-  
plained in this section marked Cab Entry  
and Exit.  
Wearing shoes with soles that are dirty  
or wet increases the chance of slipping  
and falling. Be careful when entering the  
cab with dirty or wet soles.  
WARNING  
Both the operator and passenger should  
exercise caution when entering or exiting  
the cab. Use the steps and grab handles  
to safely get in and out of the cab.  
Do not stand on the steps or any other  
part of the vehicle while it is in motion.  
The steps and the back of cab access  
deck plates are only for entering/exiting  
the vehicle and not for riding on. Failure  
to heed this warning can result in seri-  
ous personal injury or death.  
Steps are designed to be slip resistant  
and to provide a stable surface for  
entering or exiting the cab. However, ac-  
cumulation of ice, dirt, lubricants, etc.  
on the steps can make entering or exit-  
ing hazardous. Always make sure the  
steps are free from slippery substances.  
Failure to follow this guideline may re-  
sult in a fall that can cause serious  
personal injury or death.  
W8002808  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
22 Vehicle Access  
General Entry Guidelines  
8
9
If a step is mounted to the top of the  
battery box, be certain that the battery  
box cover is properly fastened before  
stepping.  
To avoid personal injury due to a slip  
and/or fall, observe the following guide-  
lines.  
Do not jump from the cab or from the  
steps to the ground.  
10 Always face the cab when entering or  
1
2
Always have three limbs (one foot and  
two hands or two feet and one hand)  
in contact with the vehicle at all times  
when entering or exiting the cab or the  
area behind the cab.  
exiting.  
11 Do not hold anything in your hands  
when entering or exiting the cab or the  
area behind the cab. Log books, cups,  
clipboards, jackets, luggage and the  
like can be placed on the cab floor or  
rear deck plate before entering or exit-  
ing.  
Be certain you have a firm handhold  
and/or stable foot position before  
transferring weight to that position. For  
example, do not start to put weight on  
a foot until you are certain your foot is  
properly on the step and will not slip  
when you transfer your weight.  
12 Be sure to disconnect the safety belt  
before exiting the cab.  
3
4
Do not climb on top of the frame, fuel  
tanks or storage boxes to make trailer  
hook-ups.  
13 Be sure that the safety belt is fully re-  
tracted and out of the way prior to  
entering or exiting the cab.  
If the vehicle is equipped with air fair-  
ings, do not use the side mounted  
fairing (wind deflector) brackets and  
braces as steps or grab handles.  
14 Do not put your foot on any surface  
that does not have slip resistant, self-  
cleaning material. If there is no step  
material, the surface may be slippery  
and you could fall.  
5
Be certain that the grab handles are  
clear of snow, mud, ice or other sub-  
stances that could make them slippery  
before using them. Do not use steps or  
grab handles if they are slippery or  
damaged.  
15 Before entering or exiting, be certain  
that the soles of your shoes/boots are  
free from grease, mud or any other  
substance which could make them  
slippery.  
6
7
Be certain that all grab handles, steps  
and related parts are in good working  
condition. Any defects should be re-  
ported and repaired before using the  
grab handles and steps.  
16 Always put the foot flat on the top of  
the step. Do not place your foot on the  
side or edge of the step.  
Do not step on the curved surface of  
the fuel tanks. They may be slippery  
from snow, mud, ice, water, spilled  
fuel or other slippery substances.  
BE SURE TO FOLLOW ALL OF  
THESE INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE EN-  
TERING OR EXITING THE CAB OR  
THE AREA BEHIND THE CAB.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vehicle Access 23  
Driver Side Entry/Exit  
Open the door. Place any hand-carried  
items on the cab floor. Grasp the right grab  
handle with your right hand and the left  
grab handle with your left hand. Put the  
right foot fully on the bottom step and pull  
yourself up to the opening.  
Slide hands up on the handles, if necessary.  
Put the left foot on the top step and step up.  
Step into the cab with the right foot first.  
To exit, reverse the process. Do not attempt  
to exit the cab while carrying any items in  
your hands.  
WARNING  
W0001911  
On vehicles without side fairings, al-  
ways make sure that the battery box  
cover is securely fastened before step-  
ping up. Failure to fasten the cover may  
lead to personal injury.  
Passenger Side Entry/Exit  
Open the door. Place any hand-carried  
items on the cab floor. Grasp the left grab  
handle with your left hand and the right  
grab handle with your right hand. Put the  
left foot fully on the bottom step and pull  
yourself up to the opening.  
Slide hands up on the handles, if necessary.  
Put the right foot on the top step and step  
up.  
Step into the cab with the left foot first.  
To exit, reverse the process. Do not attempt  
to exit the cab while carrying any items in  
your hands.  
W0001910  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
24 Vehicle Access  
Behind the Cab Entry  
When trailer air and electrical connections  
can not be coupled from the ground, Fed-  
eral Regulations require commercial  
carriers to provide back-of-cab access steps,  
grab handles and plates.  
Depending on what option is chosen, grab  
handles are available in many variations. In  
each case, make sure to always have three  
limbs (one foot and two hands or two feet  
and one hand) in contact with the vehicle at  
all times when entering or exiting the area  
behind the cab.  
WARNING  
W8001363  
Wearing shoes with soles that are dirty  
or wet increases the chance of slipping  
or falling. Be careful when entering the  
back-of-cab area with dirty or wet soles.  
Grasp the grab handle to the left with both  
hands. Put the left foot onto the bottom  
step and pull yourself up. Put the right foot  
on the top step and step onto the deck plate  
with the left foot.  
WARNING  
Always perform trailer hook-ups while  
standing on the ground. Do not climb  
on top of fuel tanks or frame rails to  
hook up or disconnect trailer air lines  
and electrical cord. Use only the metal,  
slip resistant steps provided to prevent a  
slip and fall injury.  
W9000077  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vehicle Access 25  
Stand on the ground when connecting the  
air and electrical connections to the trailer.  
W5000713  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
26 Vehicle Access  
Hood  
The hood is locked down by two latches,  
one on each side of the back end of the  
hood. The latches are operated by a handle  
on the bottom edge of the dashboard.  
Pull the bottom of the handle out to release  
hood. The hood will be raised about two  
inches off its resting position and remain  
there.  
Make sure the hood can be opened fully  
without hitting anything. Stand sideways in  
front of the hood with feet in line with the  
vehicle. Place feet well apart and grasp the  
recessed handle in the front part of the  
hood. Transfer the body weight by leaning  
away from the hood. Lift the hood until it  
is past the balance point. Release the hood  
and let it complete the opening movement  
unaided.  
W8000986  
Two restraint cylinders will engage during  
the last part of the opening. The cylinders  
will slow and dampen the hood down to its  
resting position.  
WARNING  
W0001912  
Make sure that no one is in the way of  
the hood when closing. The hood could  
injure a person in the way while being  
lowered.  
To close the hood, stand with feet well  
apart and place the hands along the front  
edge of the hood. Bend the knees and let  
the leg muscles do the work when lifting.  
Raise the hood up to the halfway point.  
Carefully guide the hood down with  
enough speed that the hood latches lock the  
hood in place when it comes to its normal  
resting position.  
W0001913  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vehicle Access 27  
Manual Hood Opening  
In the event of a malfunction in the hood  
opening mechanism, the hood latches can  
be manually operated through an opening  
in the wheelwell splash shield. The opening  
is normally covered by a plate.  
To access the opening, remove the two  
screws using a T30 Torx screwdriver. Re-  
move the cover plate.  
W8002389  
The hood latch can now be accessed  
through the hole. Operate the latch manu-  
ally by pushing the lever in towards the  
engine. Do the same on the other side.  
W8000981  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
28 Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance  
General  
Before working on or inspecting a vehi-  
cle, set the parking brakes, place the  
transmission in neutral and block the  
wheels. Failure to do so can result in un-  
expected vehicle movement and can  
cause serious personal injury or death.  
Safety is the most important and obvious  
reason for doing a pre-trip inspection. Fed-  
eral and state laws require inspection done  
by the driver. Federal and state inspectors  
also inspect commercial vehicles. An un-  
safe vehicle can be placed “out of service”  
until the driver or owner corrects the  
pending on the application of the vehicle  
being used, these guidelines should be  
modified to include other necessary inspec-  
tion points. For example, steps and grab  
handles should be checked daily on refuse  
trucks because the operator is getting in  
and out of the cab more frequently.  
deficiency. Owners and operators should fa-  
miliarize themselves with sections 49 CFR  
396.11 and 396.13 concerning Federal re-  
quirements for vehicle inspection. Certain  
other laws may also apply.  
If any component or system does not pass  
this inspection, it must be corrected before  
operating the vehicle. Whenever equipment  
requires adjustment, replacement, repair or  
lubrication, refer to the Service Manuals or  
contact a Volvo Truck dealer for the correct  
procedures, specifications and intervals.  
Section 49 CFR 396.13 states that all motor  
carrier drivers must complete a written re-  
port at the end of each work day for each  
vehicle operated, covering most of what is  
covered in the pre-trip list. The report  
should list all defects or deficiencies dis-  
covered by the driver. Doing a pre-trip  
inspection prepares for the end-of-work re-  
port.  
Take your time going through the pre-trip  
inspection. Remember that a careful pre-trip  
inspection saves time by eliminating un-  
scheduled stops for correcting a faulty item.  
The following information has been  
provided by the American Trucking Associ-  
ation as developed by the D.O.T. Office of  
Motor Carriers (BMCS).  
Starting on the next page are suggested  
guidelines to be used in performing truck,  
tractor and trailer pre-trip inspections. De-  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance 29  
Pre-Trip Inspection Quick List  
W1000145  
Inspect the vehicle in a circular manner as shown in the  
illustration. Numbers between parentheses in the list, re-  
fer to pages in this manual where component function  
and necessary inspection is explained in greater detail.  
Approaching the Vehicle  
Step 1: Left Side Of the Cab  
Check under the vehicle for oil, fuel,  
coolant leaks or other signs of damage.  
Left Front Wheel  
Check condition of wheel rim. Espe-  
Check body surfaces for signs of  
breaks or damage.  
cially look for cracks, missing  
lockrings, bent or broken studs,  
clamps or lugs.  
Preparation  
Open drain cocks on air tanks to let  
the tanks drain ( page 234).  
Check condition of tire: properly in-  
flated, no serious cuts, bulges, tread  
wear or any signs of misalignment;  
valve stem not touching wheel, rim or  
brake drum; valve cap in place.  
Chock wheels on vehicle and, if  
hooked up, trailer.  
Close air tank drain cocks.  
Check wheel bearing and hub: no ob-  
vious leaking on outside or inside  
wheel. Verify correct oil level in hub.  
Start the engine and let the air pres-  
sure build up to normal ( page 224).  
Stop engine.  
Switch on parking lights and four-way  
flashers ( page 94).  
Left Front Suspension  
Check condition of spring, spring  
hangers, shackles, U-bolts: no cracks,  
breaks or shifting.  
Apply parking brakes ( page 229).  
Release the hood latches ( page 26).  
Raise hood.  
Check shock absorber condition.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
30 Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance  
Step 1: Left Side Of the Cab (cont.)  
Lights and Reflectors  
Left Front Brake  
Lower hood and inspect parking,  
clearance and identification lights on  
hood and cab. They should be clean,  
operating and of the proper color.  
Condition of brake drum. With brakes  
released, look for a noticeable gap be-  
tween lining and drum (This check  
cannot be made if dust covers are in  
place).  
Reflectors clean and proper color.  
Condition of brake air hose.  
Turn on headlights. High and low  
beams should be operating and lenses  
clean. If equipped, check daytime run-  
ning lights.  
Check brake chamber mounting bolts  
and bracket.  
Check slack adjuster and chamber  
pushrod travel.  
Left and right front turn signal lights  
clean, operating and proper color.  
Raise hood.  
Condition of Front Axle and Steering Sys-  
tem, Left Side  
Grille  
No loose, worn, bent, damaged or  
missing parts.  
Check that charge air cooler and radia-  
Under Hood, Left Side  
tor or bugscreens are clean and  
undamaged.  
Check coolant hose condition.  
Step 3: Right Side Of Cab Area  
Check condition of fan drive belts.  
Check engine and surrounding areas  
for coolant, oil and fuel leaks.  
Right Front Wheel  
Check condition of wheel rim. Espe-  
Check wiring harnesses for signs of  
damage.  
cially look for cracks, missing  
lockrings, bent or broken studs,  
clamps or lugs.  
Step 2: Front Of Cab Area  
Condition of Windshield  
Check condition of tire: properly in-  
flated, no serious cuts, bulges, tread  
wear or any signs of misalignment;  
valve stem not touching wheel, rim or  
brake drum; valve cap in place.  
Check for damage and clean if dirty  
( page 44 ).  
Check windshield wiper arms for  
proper spring tension.  
Check wheel bearing and hub: no ob-  
vious leaking on outside or inside  
wheel. Verify correct oil level in hub.  
Check wiper blades for any damage,  
“dead” rubber and securement to arm.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance 31  
W1000145  
Step 3: Right Side Of Cab Area (cont.)  
Under Hood, Right Side  
Right Front Suspension  
Check condition of coolant and heater  
hoses.  
Check condition of spring, spring  
hangers, shackles, U-bolts: no cracks,  
breaks or shifting.  
Check condition of fan drive belts.  
Check engine and surrounding areas  
for coolant, oil and fuel leaks.  
Shock absorber condition.  
Right Front Brake  
Check fuel separator sight glass and  
drain if necessary. Check for leaks.  
Condition of brake drum. With brakes  
released, look for a noticeable gap be-  
tween lining and drum (This check  
cannot be made if dust covers are in  
place).  
Check wiring harnesses for signs of  
damage.  
Check air filter with brackets and  
Condition of brake air hose: check for  
any chafing.  
hoses for loose connections or dam-  
age. Check filter gauge, if mounted on  
the filter.  
Check brake chamber mounting bolts  
and bracket.  
Step 4: Right Saddle Tank Area  
Check slack adjuster and chamber  
pushrod travel. With brakes applied or  
released, look for conspicuously dif-  
ferent positions of the slack adjusters.  
Right Fuel Tank(s)  
Securely mounted and not damaged or  
leaking.  
Condition of Front Axle and Steering Sys-  
tem, Right Side  
Fuel lines secure and not leaking.  
Check that shut-off valves are open.  
No loose, worn, bent, damaged or  
missing parts.  
Tank(s) full of fuel. Cap on and secure.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
32 Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance  
Condition of Visible Components  
Suspension  
Check condition of springs (leaf or  
air), spring hangers, shackles and U-  
bolts.  
Rear of engine: not leaking.  
Transmission: not leaking. If equipped  
with oil cooler, check for leaks or that  
air-to-air cooler is not blocked.  
Axle alignment.  
Brakes  
Check drive shaft.  
Condition of brake drums. With brakes  
Exhaust system: secure, not leaking,  
not touching wires, fuel or air tubing.  
released, look for a noticeable gap be-  
tween lining and drum (This check  
cannot be made if dust covers are in  
place).  
Frame and cross members: no bends,  
cracks or breaks.  
Condition of brake hoses: check for  
any chafing.  
Air tubing and electrical wiring: se-  
cured against snagging and chafing.  
Step 5: Right Rear Vehicle Area  
Dual Wheels, One Or Two Axles  
Check brake chamber mounting bolts  
and brackets.  
Check slack adjusters and chamber  
push rod travel. With brakes applied or  
released, look for conspicuously dif-  
ferent positions of the slack adjusters.  
Check condition of wheels and rims.  
Especially look for cracks, missing  
lockrings, bent or broken spacers,  
studs, clamps or lugs.  
Check spring brakes.  
Check condition of tires: properly in-  
Step 6: Rear Of Vehicle Area  
flated, no serious cuts, bulges, tread  
wear or any signs of misalignment;  
valve stems not touching wheels, rims  
or brake drums; valve caps in place  
and no objects stuck between the  
wheels.  
Frame Area  
Frame or cross members not bent,  
cracked or otherwise damaged or  
missing.  
Check that air tubing and electrical  
lines are properly secured to the frame  
with no damage or chafing.  
Check that both tires are of same type,  
for example, not mixed radial and bias  
type and that their circumferences are  
matched.  
Lights and Reflectors  
Tail lights, brake lights and turn signal  
lights: operating, clean and proper  
color.  
Check wheel bearing and hub: no obvi-  
ous leaking on outside or inside wheel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance 33  
W1000145  
Step 7: Coupling System Area  
Fifth Wheel  
Step 8: Left Saddle Tank and Left Rear  
Vehicle Wheels Area  
Dual Wheels, One Or Two Axles  
Securely mounted to the frame.  
Check condition of wheels and rims.  
Especially look for cracks, missing  
lockrings, bent or broken spacers,  
studs, clamps or lugs.  
No missing or damaged parts.  
Check that trunnion and plate are  
properly lubricated ( page 265).  
Check condition of tires: properly in-  
flated, no serious cuts, bulges, tread  
wear or any signs of misalignment;  
valve stems not touching wheels, rims  
or brake drums; valve caps in place  
and no objects stuck between the  
wheels.  
Sliding Fifth Wheel  
Mechanism not worn, bent, damaged  
or parts missing ( page 267).  
Properly lubricated.  
Check that both tires are of same type,  
All locking pins present and locked in  
place.  
for example, not mixed radial and bias  
type and that their circumferences are  
matched.  
If air operated: no air leaks.  
Check wheel bearing and hub: no obvi-  
ous leaking on outside or inside wheel.  
Air Tubing and Electric Lines Visible From  
This Point  
Suspension  
Should be secure from dangling.  
Check condition of springs (leaf or  
air), spring hangers, shackles and  
Both air lines and electric line should  
be free from damage, oil and grease.  
U-bolts, no cracks, breaks or shifting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
34 Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance  
Brakes  
Left Fuel Tank(s)  
Condition of brake drums. With brakes  
Securely mounted and not damaged or  
leaking.  
released, look for a noticeable gap be-  
tween lining and drum (This check  
cannot be made if dust covers are in  
place).  
Fuel lines secure and not leaking.  
Check that shut-off valves are open.  
Tank(s) full of fuel. Cap on and secure.  
Condition of brake hoses: check for  
any chafing.  
Battery Area  
Check brake chamber mounting bolts  
and brackets.  
Open the battery box ( page 245). Bat-  
tery box securely mounted to vehicle.  
Check slack adjusters and chamber  
push rod travel. With brakes applied or  
released, look for conspicuously dif-  
ferent positions of the slack adjusters.  
Batteries secured against movement  
( page 245).  
Battery cases not broken or leaking.  
Battery cables free from damage.  
Check spring brakes.  
Tops of batteries and terminals clean  
and free from foreign material.  
Condition of Visible Components  
Transmission: not leaking.  
If equipped, replace battery lid and  
make sure it is securely fastened  
( page 245).  
Drive shaft: looks OK.  
Exhaust system: secure, not leaking,  
not touching wires, fuel or air tubing.  
Frame and cross members: no bends,  
cracks or breaks.  
Air tubing and electrical wiring: se-  
cured against snagging and chafing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance 35  
W1000145  
In the Cab  
Check steps and grab handles for  
Check climate control and defroster  
( page 168). If equipped, check mirror  
heater.  
looseness or breakage ( page 22).  
Also, clean them if there is any sub-  
stance that makes them slippery, which  
makes cab entry/exit hazardous.  
Check condition of warning triangles,  
fire extinguisher and flares ( page 62).  
Start the engine. If equipped, check  
that exhaust rain cap opens when ac-  
celerating engine.  
Adjust the seat ( page 180). Check  
mirror adjustment.  
Check safety belts for function and  
damage ( page 49).  
Check gauges and telltale light func-  
tion ( page 79).  
Apply service brakes. After initial  
drop, pressure should hold steady, or  
increase slightly, with engine at idle.  
Check function of low air warning  
( page 85). Check the Graphic Display  
for any fault codes ( page 108).  
Check steering wheel for excessive  
free play.  
Check clutch function ( page 222). If  
equipped, check for clutch brake func-  
tion.  
Check for loose items in the cab. Se-  
cure them if necessary.  
Check windshield wipers and washers  
( page 43) and horns, including back-  
up alarm, if equipped.  
Clean inside windshield, door win-  
dows and instruments. Clean mirrors.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
36 Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance  
Hooking Up To Trailer  
Hook-up Preparation  
Check kingpin and mounting plate on  
trailer, free from wear, bends or dam-  
age.  
Chock trailer wheels.  
Fifth Wheel Or Trailer Hitch  
No visible space between fifth wheel  
and trailer ( page 273).  
Locking jaws around the shank and  
not the head of kingpin ( page 273).  
Release lever properly seated and  
safety latch/lock engaged ( page 274).  
Check all connections to dolly or  
trailer hitch and safety chains are se-  
cured.  
Check function of trailer air supply  
valve and trailer brakes.  
Sliding Fifth Wheel  
Check that fifth wheel is not so far  
forward that the tractor frame will  
strike the landing gear during turns.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance 37  
W0001919  
NOTE! Refer to the trailer manufacturer’s  
manual for specific information on the  
trailer checks.  
Step 9: Trailer Front Area  
Spare Wheel(s)  
Air and Electrical Connections  
Carrier or rack not damaged.  
Glad hands properly mounted, free  
from damage and not leaking.  
Spare wheel securely mounted in rack.  
Trailer cord receptacle properly  
Tire and wheel condition adequate for  
a spare: proper size, properly inflated.  
mounted, free of damage; plug prop-  
erly seated and safety catch engaged  
to prevent accidental disconnect.  
Lights and Reflectors  
Air and electrical lines properly se-  
cured against tangling, snagging and  
chafing with sufficient slack for turns.  
Trailer side clearance lights: clean, op-  
erating and proper color.  
Step 10: Right Side of Trailer Area  
Reflectors clean and proper color.  
Landing Gear or Dolly Area  
Frame and Body  
Fully raised; no missing or damaged  
parts.  
Frame and crossmembers not bent,  
cracked, damaged or missing.  
Crank handle present and secured.  
Proper placarding.  
If power operated, no air/hydraulic  
leaks.  
Body parts not damaged or missing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
38 Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance  
Step 11: Right Rear Trailer Wheel  
tween lining and drum (This check  
cannot be made if dust covers are in  
place).  
Dual Wheels, One Or Two Axles  
Check condition of wheels and rims.  
Condition of brake hoses: check for  
any chafing.  
Especially look for cracks, missing  
lockrings, bent or broken spacers,  
studs, clamps or lugs.  
Check brake chamber mounting bolts  
and brackets.  
Check condition of tires: properly in-  
flated, no serious cuts, bulges, tread  
wear or any signs of misalignment;  
valve stems not touching wheels, rims  
or brake drums; valve caps in place  
and no objects stuck between the  
wheels.  
Check slack adjusters and chamber  
push rod travel. With brakes applied or  
released, look for conspicuously dif-  
ferent positions of the slack adjusters.  
Check spring brakes.  
Check that both tires are of same type,  
Step 12: Rear of Trailer Area  
for example, not mixed radial and bias  
type and that their circumferences are  
matched.  
Lights and Reflectors  
Rear clearance, identification and tail  
lights clean, operating and proper  
color.  
Check wheel bearing and hub: no obvi-  
ous leaking on outside or inside wheel.  
Suspension  
Reflectors clean and proper color.  
Condition of springs (leaf or air),  
Cargo Securement  
spring hangers, shackles and U-bolts.  
Axle alignment.  
Cargo properly blocked, braced, tied,  
chained, etc.  
Condition of torque rod arms.  
Tailboard up and properly secured.  
End gates free from damage, properly  
secured in stake pockets.  
If equipped with sliding axles, check  
position and alignment. Look for dam-  
aged, worn or missing parts, all locks  
present, fully in place and locked.  
Canvas or tarp (if required) properly  
latched down to prevent water damage,  
tearing, billowing or blockage of either  
mirrors or tail lights.  
Flexible air tubing not cracked, cut,  
crimped or otherwise damaged. Se-  
cured against tangling, dragging and  
chafing.  
Rear doors securely closed, latched or  
locked; required security seals in place.  
Brakes  
Condition of brake drums. With brakes  
released, look for a noticeable gap be-  
Underside guard in place: not cracked,  
bent or broken.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance 39  
W0001919  
NOTE! Refer to the trailer manufacturer’s  
manual for specific information on the  
trailer checks.  
Step 13: Left Rear Trailer Wheels Area  
If equipped with sliding axles, check  
position and alignment. Look for dam-  
aged, worn or missing parts, all locks  
present, fully in place and locked.  
Dual Wheels, One Or Two Axles  
Check condition of wheels and rims.  
Especially look for cracks, lockrings  
missing, bent or broken spacers, studs,  
clamps or lugs.  
Flexible air tubing not cracked, cut,  
crimped or otherwise damaged. It  
should be secured against tangling,  
dragging and chafing.  
Check condition of tires: properly in-  
flated, no serious cuts, bulges, tread  
wear or any signs of misalignment;  
valve stems not touching wheels, rims  
or brake drums; valve caps in place  
and no objects stuck between the  
wheels.  
Brakes  
Condition of brake drums. With brakes  
released, look for a noticeable gap be-  
tween lining and drum (This check  
can not be made if dust covers are in  
place).  
Check that both tires are of same type,  
for example, not mixed radial and bias  
type and that their circumferences are  
matched.  
Condition of brake hoses: check for  
any chafing.  
Check wheel bearing and hub: no obvi-  
ous leaking on outside or inside wheel.  
Check brake chamber mounting bolts  
and brackets.  
Suspension  
Check slack adjusters and chamber  
push rod travel. With brakes applied or  
released, look for conspicuously dif-  
ferent positions of the slack adjusters.  
Condition of springs (leaf or air),  
spring hangers, shackles and U-bolts.  
Axle alignment.  
Condition of torque rod arms.  
Check spring brakes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
40 Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance  
Step 14: Left Side of Trailer Area  
Before Leaving the Parking Area  
Landing Gear or Dolly Area  
Remove chocks from the wheels.  
Fully raised; no missing or damaged  
parts.  
Test trailer hook-up by slowly pulling  
while applying the trailer brakes with  
the trailer brake hand control valve.  
Crank handle present and secured.  
Test the service brakes before leaving  
the parking area.  
If power operated, no air/hydraulic  
leaks.  
Test parking brakes by stopping on a  
Spare Wheel(s)  
20% grade and applying the parking  
brakes. The parking brakes shall hold  
the combined vehicle and trailer with-  
out moving.  
Spare wheel securely mounted in rack  
with no damage to rack.  
Tire and wheel condition adequate for  
a spare: proper size, properly inflated.  
Lights and Reflectors  
Trailer side clearance lights: clean, op-  
erating and proper color.  
Reflectors clean and proper color.  
Frame and Body  
Frame and crossmembers not bent,  
cracked, damaged or missing.  
Proper placarding.  
Body parts not damaged or missing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance 41  
Daily Maintenance  
The following should be checked daily in  
addition to doing the pre-trip inspection of  
the truck or tractor and trailer.  
Before working on or inspecting a vehi-  
cle, set the parking brakes, place the  
transmission in neutral and block the  
wheels. Failure to do so can result in un-  
expected vehicle movement and can  
cause serious personal injury or death.  
While checking the fluid levels, visually in-  
spect hoses, pipes and their connections for  
signs of leakage. Inspect the ground under  
engine, transmission and rear axle(s) for  
signs of leakage.  
Check coolant level in the coolant tank.  
The level should be above the minimum  
mark shown on the side of the tank.  
WARNING  
Do not remove the cap to the surge tank  
while the engine and radiator are still  
hot and under pressure. Scalding fluid  
and/or steam may be blown out under  
pressure if the cap is taken off too soon.  
W2003475  
If the coolant level is low, add more  
coolant to the tank so the level is above the  
minimum mark. Coolant should be filled  
through the cap in the middle of the tank.  
CAUTION  
Add only pre-mixed coolant made up of  
50% clean water and 50% antifreeze.  
See the “Operator’s Manual, Mainte-  
nance & Engine” for more detailed  
information.  
CAUTION  
Engines equipped with automatic start  
systems can start automatically. Alarm  
sounds before automatic start. Failure to  
turn off ignition before working on fan  
or belts can result in personal injury.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
42 Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance  
WARNING  
Keep yourself clear of all moving or hot  
engine parts. A hot engine can cause se-  
rious burns.  
Check oil level in the engine with the dip-  
stick. The oil level should be between the  
minimum and maximum marks on the dip-  
stick. Do not overfill!  
See the “Operator’s Manual, Maintenance  
and Engine” for correct types of oil used in  
Volvo engines.  
W2003508  
CAUTION  
If the vehicle is equipped with an aero-  
dynamic bumper, do not step on or press  
in between the bumper and the wheel.  
Breakage or damage may result.  
W2003476  
To add oil to a D12 engine, remove oil cap  
on the valve cover and fill through the hole.  
There is also a right-side oil fill.  
CAUTION  
Make sure the oil added is the same  
type of oil that is in the engine. The  
wrong type of oil could accelerate wear  
on engine if not suited for application.  
W2003486  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance 43  
Check fluid level in the clutch fluid reser-  
voir. Fluid level should be between the  
level marks on the reservoir.  
If fluid needs to be added, use brake fluid,  
DOT 4.  
W4000726  
Check level in the windshield washer reser-  
voir. If washer fluid needs to be added, use  
a commercially reputable washer fluid that  
has good cleaning capability and does not  
freeze in cold weather.  
Total reservoir capacity is 3.3 gallons  
(12.5 liters). An indicator will appear on  
the diagnostic display when there is  
approximately 1.4 gallons (5.3 liters) re-  
maining in the reservoir.  
W8000985  
Check that windshield wipers and washer  
are working properly.  
The windshield washer spray should cover  
the windshield well. The wipers should  
clean the windshield in a couple of strokes  
and should not leave any streaks.  
W3000874  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
44 Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance  
If the windshield needs an overall cleaning,  
use a long handled cleaning sponge and  
squeegee.  
Clean the side windows in the same way  
with a long handled sponge and squeegee.  
W8002766  
Check all lights for proper function:  
Headlights  
Daytime running lights  
Parking and marker lights  
Stoplights  
Turn signals  
W3004425  
NOTE! Make sure that all fluid levels are  
at their proper levels. If the fluids are not at  
their proper levels, add as necessary. Refer  
to the “Operator’s Manual, Maintenance  
and Engine” for information on what types  
of fluids are recommended for your Volvo  
vehicle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily Maintenance 45  
WARNING  
When draining the air tanks, do not look  
into the area of the draining air. Dirt or  
sludge particles may be in the air stream  
that could cause eye injury.  
Empty out the air tanks daily. With the air  
system fully charged and with the engine  
shut off, listen for air leaks.  
W5001203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
46 Additional Safety Features  
Safety Belts  
General  
Safety belts must be properly worn at all  
times by the driver and all passengers  
while the vehicle is in motion even if  
the vehicle is equipped with a Supple-  
mental Restraint System (SRS or air  
bag). Failure to do so can result in seri-  
ous personal injury or death in the event  
of a collision.  
Fasten the safety belt before starting to  
drive. Trying to fasten the safety belt  
while the vehicle is moving may lead to  
an accident, causing serious personal in-  
jury or death.  
W8001834  
Safety belt assemblies installed in this vehi-  
cle meet FMVSS 209, “Type 1” and “Type  
2” requirements. They are recommended  
for all persons weighing over 50 lb (25 kg).  
A child restraint system should also be pro-  
vided for each child weighing 50 lb (25 kg)  
or less. It should meet the requirements of  
FMVSS 213, “Child Restraint System.”  
Carefully read and follow all manufac-  
turer’s instructions on installation and use.  
Make certain the child remains in the re-  
straint system at all times while the vehicle  
is in motion.  
W8002741  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional Safety Features 47  
Safety belts must be worn by the driver and  
all passengers at all times. Before adjusting  
or fastening the safety belt, move the seat  
forward or rearward and adjust the seat  
height as necessary. Sit erect and adjust the  
seat cushion and seat back for a comfort-  
able driving position. In the event of a  
collision, a correct driving position maxi-  
mizes the effectiveness of the safety belt.  
There are both Federal and State laws gov-  
erning the use of safety belts. As laws  
differ from state to state, make yourself fa-  
miliar with the current rules.  
W8001077  
Tether straps are installed on some  
suspension-type seats. Tether straps help se-  
cure the seat to the floor and are intended  
to restrain the seat and safety belt in case  
of an accident or sudden stop.  
The tethers are not adjustable and do not  
need any adjustment.  
W8001387  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
48 Additional Safety Features  
Operating the Safety Belt  
To fasten the safety belt, pull the belt out  
from the retractor and insert the latch into  
the buckle. Verify proper lock of the latch  
by pulling on the latch.  
Adjust the slack by pulling on the top part  
of the belt until the lower part, or the part  
that crosses the lap, is snugly adjusted. Re-  
lease the top part and let the retractor pull  
the belt in.  
The lap portion of the safety belt should be  
worn low across the pelvic region (hip  
bone) and adjusted snugly. Never adjust the  
lap belt across the abdomen. A push button  
on the buckle is used to release the safety  
belt latch by pushing in the button release  
on the buckle.  
W8001835  
The buckle portion of the safety belt sys-  
tem is different depending on the seat  
option chosen. The National Standard and  
Comfort seat has a separate buckle that is  
attached to a floor anchor by a seat strap.  
This seat strap is not adjustable, and does  
not need to be adjusted.  
W8001836  
The buckle for the Volvo seat is part of the  
seat frame.  
If a comfort clip is used on the safety belt,  
always adjust the latch so that there is a  
maximum of 1 in. (25 mm) slack between  
the belt and chest (about the width of two  
fingers). If a larger slack is allowed, the ef-  
fectiveness of the safety belt is decreased in  
the event of a collision. Operation of the  
clip is described on page 54.  
Make sure the safety belt is completely re-  
tracted and out of the way when not in use.  
W8001837  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional Safety Features 49  
Inspection  
Check the belts, buckles, latch plates, re-  
tractors, anchorages, and guide loops to  
ensure that they are working properly. Look  
Failure to properly inspect and maintain  
the safety belts can cause serious per-  
sonal injury or death.  
for loose/damaged parts (without disassem-  
bling) that could keep the restraint system  
from working properly. If the safety belt,  
retractor and hardware were in use during a  
collision, they must be replaced. The re-  
straint system anchorage fasteners must be  
replaced if necessary. If there is any doubt  
about the restraint system’s effectiveness,  
replace the entire safety belt assembly.  
It is critical that any time a vehicle has  
been involved in an accident, the entire  
safety belt system must be replaced in  
the vehicle (which also includes the  
sleeper bunk restraints) if they were in  
use at the time of the accident. Failure  
to replace the safety belt system may re-  
sult in serious injury or death.  
A damaged safety belt, whether visibly  
damaged or not, could result in serious  
personal injury in the event of an acci-  
dent. The safety belt systems should be  
replaced at least every five years.  
Do not bleach or re-dye the color web-  
bing because it may cause a severe loss  
of belt strength. This loss of strength  
could allow the safety belt to break  
under stress, thus resulting in severe per-  
sonal injury or death.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
50 Additional Safety Features  
The following maintenance guidelines de-  
tail how to inspect safety belts and tethers  
for cuts, fraying, extreme or unusual wear  
of the webbing, etc., and damage to the  
buckle, retractor, hardware or other factors  
which indicate that safety belt system re-  
placement is necessary.  
Check the web wear at the buckle/latch  
area. The webbing must be closely exam-  
ined to determine if there are any cuts,  
fraying or extreme wear in the webbing.  
Cuts, fraying or excessive wear would indi-  
cate the need for replacement of the safety  
belt system.  
W8001406  
The D-loop web guide is an area where al-  
most constant movement of the safety belt  
webbing occurs because of the relative  
movement between the seat and the cab.  
This constant movement forms an area  
where wear will often occur. The webbing  
must be closely examined to determine if  
there are any cuts, fraying or extreme wear  
in the webbing. Cuts, fraying or excessive  
wear would indicate the need for replace-  
ment of the safety belt system.  
W8002478  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional Safety Features 51  
Check to make sure that the D-loop web  
guide is rotating properly. If the guide is  
not rotating properly, the webbing will pull  
at the wrong angle through the guide, ac-  
celerating wear.  
W8002477  
If equipped, check the comfort clip for  
cracks or possible damage. Make sure that  
it works properly.  
Check the buckle by inserting the latch and  
verifying proper operation. Determine if the  
latch plate is worn or deformed. Check the  
buckle and latch casing for cracks or  
breakage.  
W8001404  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
52 Additional Safety Features  
The retractor web storage device is  
mounted on the B-pillar, just behind the  
door in the cab. The retractor is the heart of  
the safety belt system and can be damaged  
if abused, even unintentionally. Check the  
retractor web storage device operation to  
ensure that it is not locked and that it spools  
out and retracts the webbing properly.  
W8002481  
If tethers are being used to anchor the  
safety belts to the floor, make sure that they  
are properly attached to the seat. Tethers  
must also be inspected for web wear and  
proper tightness of mounting hardware.  
W8001387  
All hardware for safety belt mounting  
points should be evaluated for corrosion.  
All attachment points of the system should  
be checked for tightness of mounting  
hardware.  
Check the web in areas exposed to ultra-  
violet rays from the sun or extreme dust or  
dirt. If the original color of the web in  
these areas is extremely faded, the physical  
strength of this web may have deteriorated.  
If this condition exists, replace the safety  
belt system.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional Safety Features 53  
Important Facts About Safety Belts in Heavy Trucks  
The high mileage associated with heavy  
trucks, the continual relative movement of  
the seat with the cab, the possible contact  
with the vehicle seat or other parts of the  
cab structure, and the potential exposure of  
this safety belt to severe environmental con-  
ditions make it crucial to inspect the seat  
belt system regularly. It is recommended  
that the system is inspected every 15 000  
miles (24 000 km) or more often if the ve-  
hicle is exposed to severe environmental or  
vocational conditions. Any safety belt sys-  
tem that shows cuts, fraying, extreme or  
unusual wear, significant discolorations due  
to ultra-violet ray exposure, dusty-dirty  
conditions, abrasion to the safety belt web-  
bing or damage to the buckle, latch plate,  
retractor, hardware or any other obvious  
problem should be replaced immediately,  
regardless of the mileage.  
Once replacement of the safety belt has  
been determined necessary, be certain that  
it is replaced only with a Volvo original re-  
placement safety belt. See your authorized  
Volvo Truck dealer for replacement. Your  
Volvo safety belt system has been devel-  
oped and tested specifically for heavy  
trucks. Replace it only with the exact same  
design that the vehicle was equipped with.  
If the inspection indicates that any other  
part of the safety belt system requires re-  
placement, the entire belt system must be  
replaced. An installation guide is attached  
to every replacement system, entitled  
“Three-Point Safety Belt Installation  
Guide.” There are separate safety belt  
instruction guides for suspension and sta-  
tionary seats. Use the proper guide for your  
type of seat and follow the instructions  
very closely. It is vitally important that all  
components are mounted back in the same  
positions as the original components that  
were removed. This will maintain the de-  
sign integrity of the mounting points for the  
safety belt assembly.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
54 Additional Safety Features  
Comfort Clip Operation  
When provided, the comfort clip is located  
on the shoulder strap just below the D-ring.  
When adjusting the comfort clip, the fol-  
lowing procedure must be followed for  
proper adjustment:  
1
2
Pull out only enough webbing to allow  
slight pressure to the shoulder and  
chest. Allow no more than a 1 in.  
(25 mm) slack when measured be-  
tween the chest and the belt.  
To activate the clip mechanism feature,  
lift the lever up to clamp the webbing  
in place.  
NOTE! When the safety belt is not in use,  
the clip should be in the open position to  
allow the seat belt to retract to its proper  
position. Also make sure that the adjust-  
ment of the comfort clip does not interfere  
with the operation of the safety belt.  
W8002388  
Open position  
Always adjust the clip so that there is a  
maximum of 1 in. (25 mm) of slack be-  
tween the belt and chest (about two fingers  
width). If a larger slack is allowed, the ef-  
fectiveness of the safety belt is decreased in  
the event of a collision.  
W8001837  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional Safety Features 55  
SRS Airbag  
WARNING  
The SRS airbag is intended to supple-  
ment — not replace — the standard  
safety belt. The airbag is not deployed  
when the truck is hit from behind, from  
the side or if it rolls over. For best pro-  
tection, sit in a normal, upright position.  
Always wear the safety belt.  
For added safety, the vehicle may be  
equipped with an airbag or SRS (Supple-  
mental Restraint System) as a supplement  
to the standard three-point anchored safety  
belt. The SRS is designed to reduce the risk  
of injury to the driver’s face and upper part  
of the body. Together with the safety belt,  
the airbag helps prevent the driver from be-  
ing thrown against the steering wheel,  
windshield or other hard surfaces in the cab.  
The Volvo SRS Airbag provides increased  
protection in frontal collisions, where the  
vehicle collides with a fixed or heavy object  
with enough force to activate the sensors  
which then activates the airbag. Damage to  
the vehicle is not always proportional to  
whether the SRS Airbag deploys or not.  
The SRS Airbag is not designed to be acti-  
vated with:  
Collision from the sides  
Collision from the rear  
Rolling over  
Head-on collisions at low speed or  
against soft objects such as bushes,  
snow drifts, etc.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
56 Additional Safety Features  
SRS System  
The inflatable airbag is folded into the cen-  
ter of the steering wheel. It inflates in the  
event of a serious collision above a certain  
level, where the angle of impact, crash  
severity, speed and nature of the object in-  
volved in the collision all play a part in  
whether or not the airbag is activated.  
T8006849  
The system consists of a gas generator sur-  
rounded by the inflatable airbag. In the  
event of a sufficiently violent collision, a  
control unit activates the gas generator ig-  
nitor and the airbag inflates and heats up at  
the same time. To cushion the impact, the  
airbag deflates when compressed. This also  
releases some non-toxic smoke into the  
cab. The entire sequence, from inflation to  
deflation of the airbag, takes a few tenths  
of a second.  
WARNING  
T8006855  
Never attempt to drive with a deployed  
airbag. With the bag hanging out of the  
hub of the steering wheel, the truck may  
be more difficult to steer. In addition,  
other safety systems may be damaged.  
Continuous exposure to the smoke and  
dust created during the deployment of  
the airbag can cause irritation to the skin  
and eyes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional Safety Features 57  
The SRS system is continually monitored  
by the control unit. A control unit is  
mounted on a bracket above the engine  
cover which detects deceleration. The con-  
trol unit also contains a standby power unit  
which can supply the system with power  
for a short time, should the normal supply  
be broken.  
T8006857  
If the control unit detects a sufficiently vio-  
lent deceleration (collision), the system is  
activated. The gas generator triggers and  
fills the bag with a non-toxic gas within a  
few hundredths of a second. During a colli-  
sion, after the bag has been filled, gas flows  
out through two holes in the weave. These  
holes are large enough to let the airbag col-  
lapse slowly, gently catching the driver.  
In the event of a problem in the SRS sys-  
tem, a telltale shows on the graphic display  
in the instrument cluster. This telltale, to-  
gether with other telltales in the cluster,  
also light up when the engine is started.  
The telltale should go out after approxi-  
mately 10 seconds when the starting key  
has been turned to the drive position.  
W3000982  
If a problem develops in the system, the  
INFO telltale will come on together with  
the SRS telltale.  
CAUTION  
The vehicle should be taken to an autho-  
rized Volvo Truck dealer immediately if  
the SRS telltale stays on or lights up  
when the vehicle is being driven.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
58 Additional Safety Features  
Warning Labels  
The label attached to the left hand sunvisor  
shows the year and month when a Volvo  
Truck dealer should be contacted for a  
specific inspection and for a possible re-  
placement of the airbag. This is done to  
guarantee the function of the airbag after  
the stated date. Replace the label when re-  
placing the airbag module. Never attempt  
to make any adjustments to SRS compo-  
nents yourself.  
T8006843  
Steering shafts and steering wheel should  
not be removed, adjusted or replaced with-  
out following the proper work procedure.  
Failure to do so can damage the SRS sys-  
tem to the point where it does not work any  
longer. A warning label is located on the  
upper steering shaft.  
T8006842  
There is also a label on the inside of the  
windshield that indicates the inclusion of  
an airbag to the vehicle safety features.  
T8006841  
When equipped with an airbag, a label  
about the correct procedure for protecting  
small children and protecting the driver is  
attached to the left hand, overhead storage  
lid or back of sunvisor.  
W8002741  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional Safety Features 59  
Any queries concerning the SRS system  
should be directed to a Volvo Truck dealer.  
There is no maintenance required for the  
SRS system until the date stated on the  
warning label located on the left hand sun-  
visor.  
Never attempt to repair any part of the  
SRS system. Any interference with the  
system may cause it to malfunction and  
result in serious injury. Work on the sys-  
tem may only be carried out by an  
authorized Volvo Truck dealer.  
To allow the SRS system to work as de-  
signed:  
Never drive an SRS system equipped  
vehicle with the hands on the steering  
wheel pad/airbag module.  
No objects, accessory equipment or  
stickers may be placed on, attached to  
or installed near the SRS cover in the  
center of the steering wheel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
60 Additional Safety Features  
General Information  
When is the airbag deployed?  
The airbag is only deployed during a head-  
on collision, where the vehicle hits a fixed  
or heavy object with sufficient force. The  
SRS system registers both the force of the  
collision and the internal forces caused by  
the collision. The control unit determines if  
the collision is sufficiently violent for the  
airbag to be deployed.  
NOTE! The SRS system is only activated  
once in a collision. If the airbag has de-  
ployed, the following is recommended:  
Have the vehicle towed to a Volvo  
Truck dealer. Even if the vehicle can  
be driven after a collision, it is not  
recommended to drive the truck  
with the airbag deployed.  
Have an authorized Volvo Truck dealer  
change the components in the SRS  
system.  
Only use original Volvo parts when re-  
placing the SRS system components  
(airbag, safety belt, etc.).  
When is the airbag not deployed?  
Not all frontal collisions activate the SRS  
system. In a collision with a soft object (a  
snow drift or bush for example, or a hard  
or fixed object at low speed), there is no  
need for the SRS system to be activated.  
The airbag is usually not inflated in re-  
sponse to side-on collisions, impacts from  
the rear or if the vehicle overturns. The ex-  
tent of damage to the vehicle is no measure  
of how well the SRS system works.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional Safety Features 61  
Can the airbag be deployed acci-  
dentally?  
The complete SRS system is constructed so  
that the airbag only inflates in particular  
collision conditions. The SRS system has  
its own diagnostic unit which continuously  
monitors the functioning of the system.  
Make a habit of checking the SRS system  
telltale light when starting and driving the  
vehicle.  
Heart of the Volvo safety system  
The three-point anchored safety belt is  
the heart of the Volvo safety system. The  
belt should be worn at all times. The SRS  
system is intended as a supplement to the  
three-point anchored safety belt.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
62 Additional Safety Features  
Safety Equipment  
Safety triangles and fire extinguishers are  
available as optional equipment. The fire  
extinguisher should be located by the base  
of the driver seat, between the seat and the  
door.  
W1000071  
Warning Triangles  
The warning triangles are stored in a box  
that is strapped to the back wall of the cab.  
W0001372  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Additional Safety Features 63  
VORAD Collision Warning System  
The Eaton VORAD computerized Collision  
Warning System constantly monitors vehi-  
cles ahead with a front end mounted radar  
and in a blind spot area with an optional  
side mounted radar. The Collision Warning  
System warns the driver of potentially dan-  
gerous situations by activating visual and  
audible alerts.  
The Eaton VORAD Collision Warning  
System is intended solely as an aid for  
an alert and conscientious professional  
driver. It is not to be used or relied upon  
to operate the vehicle. Use this system  
together with rear view mirrors and  
other instrumentation to maintain safe  
operation of the vehicle. Operate a VO-  
RAD equipped vehicle in the same safe  
manner as if VORAD was not installed.  
The Eaton VORAD Collision Warning  
System is not a substitute for safe driv-  
ing procedures nor will it compensate  
for any driver impairment, such as  
drugs, alcohol or fatigue.  
The Eaton VORAD Collision Warning  
System may provide little or no warning  
for some hazards like: alerts for pedes-  
trians, animals, oncoming vehicles and  
cross traffic. SmartCruise will not react  
to stationary objects and it does not have  
the capability to stop the vehicle.  
Failure to follow these instructions may  
lead to a crash resulting in severe per-  
sonal injury or death.  
If your vehicle is equipped with the Eaton  
VORAD Collision Warning System, read  
the manufacturer’s Driver Reference Man-  
ual before taking the vehicle on the road.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
64 Instruments and Controls  
Dash Overview  
W8002383  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Air Vents ( page 176)  
Diagnostic Test Connection  
11 Ashtray  
12 Instrument Cluster, Left ( page 68)  
13 Instrument Cluster, Main ( page 76)  
14 Instrument Cluster, Right ( page 83)  
15 Trailer Hand Brake Control ( page 234)  
16 Tractor Parking Brake ( page 229)  
17 Trailer Air Supply ( page 229)  
18 Radio - option ( page 188)  
Left Switch Cluster ( page 94)  
Headlight Switch ( page 98)  
Driving/Fog Lights - option ( page 99)  
Instrument Light Dimmer ( page 107)  
Climate Unit Control Panel ( page 168)  
Hood Latch Handle ( page 26)  
Pneumatic Switches ( page 104)  
19 Optional Switches ( page 106)  
20 Right Switch Cluster ( page 100)  
10 Cigar Lighter ( page 107)  
Operating  
Before driving this vehicle, locate the in-  
struments and controls, and become  
thoroughly familiar with their operation.  
After starting and when driving, always  
check that the instrument readings are  
normal.  
NOTE! Availability of gauges depends on  
chosen options. All gauges and telltales  
may not be used in all vehicles.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and Controls 65  
Instrument Cluster Overview  
W3004396  
General  
Center Section  
The center section contains tachometer,  
speedometer and odometer. See page 76 for  
gauge information. In the lower part there  
is a central warning lamp and telltales for  
different vehicle functions. Please refer to  
page 79 for telltale information.  
The cluster is available in seven different  
configurations, with the speedometer either  
graded in mph or km/h. The cluster con-  
sists of three combined sections:  
Left Section  
Right Section  
The left section can include pyrometer, en-  
gine oil pressure gauge, engine coolant  
temperature gauge, turbo boost pressure  
gauge and a graphic display for driver  
information. See page 68 for gauge infor-  
mation and page 108 for graphic display  
information. There are telltales in the lower  
part. Please refer to page 71 for telltale  
information.  
The right section can include forward and  
rear axle temperature gauges, fuel level  
gauge, application air pressure gauge, front  
and rear brake air pressure gauges. Vehicles  
with rear air suspension may have an air  
suspension pressure gauge. See page 83 for  
gauge information. There are telltales in the  
lower part. Please refer to page 86 for tell-  
tale information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
66 Instruments and Controls  
Telltale Overview  
W3004406  
1
2
Engine Preheat ( page 72)  
13 Trailer ABS ( page 82)  
14 Air Suspension Level  
( page 82)  
Yellow  
INFO Light  
( page 73)  
3
Red  
( page 74)  
STOP Light  
15 Mirror Heater ( page 82)  
16 Right Turn ( page 80)  
17 Transmission Temperature  
( page 86)  
18 Check Transmission  
( page 86)  
4
5
6
7
No Charge ( page 75)  
Left Turn ( page 80)  
Fifth Wheel Lock ( page 80)  
Wheel Differential Lock  
( page 80)  
19 Traction Control System  
( page 86)  
8
Axle Differential Lock  
( page 80)  
20 Wait to Start (Not used)  
21 Transmission in Neutral  
( page 86)  
9
High Beam ( page 81)  
10 Safety Belt ( page 81)  
11 Parking Brakes ( page 81)  
12 Tractor ABS ( page 82)  
22 Water in Fuel (Not used)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and Controls 67  
Graphic Display Telltale Overview  
W3003534  
1
2
3
Voltmeter ( page 156)  
10 Coolant level ( page 120)  
Engine oil temperature ( page 153)  
Transmission oil temperature  
( page 119)  
Preheating active ( page 72)  
Acknowledged warning ( page 124)  
Alarm clock on ( page 161)  
PTO engaged ( page 96)  
11 Washer fluid level ( page 114)  
12 Engine airfilter clogged ( page 115)  
13 Too cold for engine brake ( page 240)  
14 Overheating, instrument cluster  
( page 114)  
4
5
6
7
8
9
15 Engine preheat fault ( page 202)  
16 Engine oil pressure ( page 70)  
17 Coolant temperature ( page 69)  
Cruise control engaged ( page 218)  
Airbag (SRS) ( page 57)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
68 Instruments and Controls  
Left Instrument Section  
A
B
Pyrometer (option) (this page)  
Engine Coolant Temperature  
( page 69)  
C
D
Engine Oil Pressure ( page 70)  
Turbo Boost Pressure (option)  
( page 71)  
E
F
Graphic Display ( page 108)  
Telltale Indicators ( page 71)  
W3003644  
A — Pyrometer (option)  
An engine pyrometer system indicates the  
exhaust temperature, which helps the opera-  
tor get the best efficiency from the engine.  
Variations in engine load can cause the ex-  
haust temperature to vary. For example,  
high exhaust gas temperature is the result  
of prolonged engine lugging or overfueling.  
If the pyrometer reading shows that exhaust  
temperature exceeds normal, reduce fuel to  
the engine until exhaust temperature is re-  
duced. Shift to a lower gear if the engine is  
overloaded.  
W3003632  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and Controls 69  
B — Engine Coolant Temperature  
The gauge indicates engine coolant temper-  
ature. Normal operating temperature  
reading is 165 to 205 F (75 to 95 C) for  
the VOLVO engine. The temperature, under  
normal driving conditions, must be below  
the red sector. The temperature range for  
the coolant will vary depending on the type  
of engine, load, grade, ambient air tempera-  
ture and operating conditions. If the  
temperature remains below or exceeds the  
normal temperature range, the cooling sys-  
tem should be checked for problems by  
your Volvo Truck dealer.  
W3003769  
The LED light in the lower right corner of  
the gauge lights up solid when coolant tem-  
perature is excessive. The temperature limit  
is dependent on the engine manufacturer  
electronic program. Together with the  
W3003614  
gauge light, the red  
STOP telltale will  
come on and the buzzer will also sound.  
The engine is at risk and the engine con-  
troller may react by derating the engine  
power. Stop at the first safe place where the  
problem can be checked.  
T3008861  
NOTE! If the coolant temperature returns  
to normal shortly after exceeding the limit  
and no repair has been made, the warning  
messages go out but there will be a fault  
message logged.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
70 Instruments and Controls  
C — Engine Oil Pressure  
The gauge indicates oil pressure by a sensor  
directly connected to the engine lubrication  
system. Normal oil pressure is 30 to 70 psi  
(210 to 480 kPa) when the engine is at nor-  
mal operating temperature. At idle speed,  
the pressure may drop to 5 to 20 psi (35 to  
140 kPa). When first starting a cold engine,  
oil pressure may exceed 90 psi (620 kPa).  
The LED light in the lower right corner of  
the gauge lights up solid when the oil pres-  
sure is too low. The pressure limit is  
dependent on the engine manufacturer elec-  
tronic program. When the gauge light  
W3003768  
comes on, the red  
STOP telltale starts  
blinking, the buzzer sounds and the oil  
pressure symbol appears on the graphic dis-  
play. The engine is at risk and the engine  
controller may react by derating the engine  
power, for example. Bring the vehicle to a  
safe stop where the problem can be  
checked.  
W3003613  
With very low oil pressure, the red STOP  
telltale lights up solid. The engine will shut  
down within 30 seconds from when the  
light came on. Pull off the road as soon as  
possible without being a safety hazard.  
T3008861  
Failure to take necessary action when  
the STOP telltale is on, can ultimately  
result in automatic engine shutdown and  
loss of power steering assist. Vehicle  
crash resulting in personal injury or  
death can occur.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and Controls 71  
D — Turbo Boost Pressure (option)  
The gauge indicates intake manifold pres-  
sure on the engine. The pressure is  
generated by the turbo. Boost pressure  
should be the same at a given engine tem-  
perature, speed and load. Turbo boost  
pressure will vary for different engines and  
vehicle models. By monitoring the gauge,  
the operator can avoid engine problems.  
W3003631  
F — Telltale Indicators, Left Section  
1
2
3
4
Engine preheat telltale ( page 72)  
Caution telltale ( page 73)  
Stop telltale ( page 74)  
No Charge telltale ( page 75)  
W3003645  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
72 Instruments and Controls  
1 — Engine Preheat Telltale  
The amber telltale will light when the in-  
take manifold preheater is operating. The  
heater is used for better cold starts. Opera-  
tion time of the heater can vary in several  
steps from 0 to 50 seconds depending on  
coolant temperature and outside air temper-  
ature. On cold mornings, the preheater will  
be on for the maximum 50 seconds. When  
the ignition key has been turned to the pre-  
heat position, the preheater coils in the  
intake manifold are activated to warm the  
intake air. Once the engine is started, the  
preheater may be re-engaged to assist in a  
quicker engine warm-up. See page 202 for  
information on using the preheater.  
T3008841  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and Controls 73  
2 — INFO Telltale  
The yellow  
INFO telltale lights up to in-  
dicate a control system or component  
malfunction. In some cases, the engine  
power may be derated (see page 114).  
T3008860  
When the telltale comes on, stop at the first  
safe place where the problem can be  
checked.  
When ignition is switched on, the telltale  
goes out unless a defect is detected.  
NOTE! On vehicles equipped with a Volvo  
engine, the telltale is on for 3 to 5 seconds  
after the ignition key switch is turned on.  
See page 113 for a listing on related mes-  
sages that trigger this telltale.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
74 Instruments and Controls  
3 — STOP Telltale  
Failure to take necessary action when  
the STOP telltale is on, can ultimately  
result in automatic engine shutdown and  
loss of power steering assist. Vehicle  
crash resulting in personal injury or  
death can occur.  
The  
STOP telltale lights up red to alert  
the operator that a severe problem has been  
detected and in some cases a preventive ac-  
tion may be taken by the engine electronics  
to protect the engine. For example: if oil  
pressure or coolant level drops too low, the  
engine will be forced to low idle and when  
the vehicle speed is zero, the engine shuts  
down. Another example is: with excessive  
coolant temperature, the engine will gradu-  
ally reduce power output to 50%. This  
telltale always activates the buzzer.  
T3008861  
The engine may be started again after the  
key is turned off and then back on. How-  
ever, it will only operate for 30 seconds  
unless the problem is resolved.  
WARNING  
If the problem is allowed to persist, seri-  
ous damage to the engine may occur.  
Always repair the cause of the problem  
before taking the vehicle into service  
again.  
The engine could be forced to low idle  
within 30 seconds from when the light  
came on. Pull off the road as soon as possi-  
ble without being a safety hazard.  
See page 120 for a listing on related mes-  
sages that trigger this telltale.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and Controls 75  
4 — No Charge Telltale  
The No Charge telltale lights up red when  
a problem exists in the charging system or  
when there is no output from the alternator,  
such as when the engine is not running.  
T3008832  
The No Charge telltale lights up dimly  
when there are several volts difference be-  
tween the system voltage and the alternator  
output voltage. The telltale shines brighter  
as the alternator output voltage drops.  
For more information on the electrical sys-  
tem, see page 245.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
76 Instruments and Controls  
Main Instrument Section  
G
H
J
Tachometer ( this page)  
Speedometer ( page 77)  
Master Warning Telltale ( page 78)  
Warning Telltales ( page 79)  
K
W3003643  
G — Tachometer  
The tachometer is electrically driven by a  
signal from the engine. Monitor the  
tachometer to guide correct gear shifting  
and to prevent engine overspeeding when  
descending steep grades. Each engine has  
its ideal operating ranges for power and  
economy. Read the engine manufacturer’s  
manual to find out the best ranges for each  
engine.  
CAUTION  
Always keep an eye on the tachometer  
during downhill runs. Do not allow the  
engine to over-speed. Excessive engine  
over-speed can result in serious engine  
damage.  
W3003639  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and Controls 77  
H — Speedometer and Odometer  
The speedometer is driven by the vehicle’s  
electronic system. Recalibration of the  
speedometer can be made to compensate  
for tire size changes or other changes in the  
vehicle driveline. This is done by repro-  
gramming the engine or transmission  
electronic controller. Reprogramming can  
be performed by your authorized Volvo  
Truck dealer.  
The odometer is a Liquid Crystal Display  
(LCD) mounted in the lower speedometer  
face. The odometer registers up to  
999,999.9 miles or km. The internal elec-  
tronics will make distance conversions  
between miles and km automatically.  
W3003640  
To be able to read the current mileage  
without turning the ignition on, press any  
graphic display control to activate the  
odometer and clock for approximately 30  
seconds.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
78 Instruments and Controls  
J — Master Warning Telltale  
The Master Warning Telltale and buzzer  
alerts of a dangerous situation. Air pres-  
sure is low and the remaining air volume  
may not be enough for repeated braking.  
The emergency brakes may engage,  
causing a wheel lock-up, loss of vehicle  
control and become a hazard to follow-  
ing vehicles. Bring the vehicle to a  
controled stop. Failure to follow these  
precautions can result in loss of braking  
control and serious personal injury or  
death can occur as a result of a vehicle  
accident.  
W3000638  
This will light up when either front or rear  
air brake system pressure drops below 60  
psi (410 kPa) or lower. The buzzer will  
also sound when the telltale lights up.  
When the pressure goes above 60 psi in  
both front and rear brake circuits, the tell-  
tale will automatically go out.  
Air brake system pressure should be be-  
tween 90 to 135 psi (620 to 930 kPa) for  
normal operation. The master warning tell-  
tale comes on and the buzzer sounds when  
air pressure has dropped to 60 psi or lower.  
If the air pressure is allowed to drop below  
30 to 40 psi (200 to 275 kPa) in both  
systems, the parking spring brakes will au-  
tomatically engage and stop the vehicle.  
When the master warning telltale comes on  
and before the parking spring brakes en-  
gage, stop the vehicle in a controlled  
manner at an off-road location so as not to  
be a hazard to other vehicles on the road.  
Refer to page 224 for more information  
about the brakes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and Controls 79  
K — Warning Telltales, Center Section  
W3003646  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Left Turn Telltale ( page 80)  
8
9
Anti-Lock Brake System (Tractor or  
Truck) Telltale ( page 82)  
Fifth Wheel Lock Telltale ( page 80)  
Wheel Diff. Lock Telltale ( page 80)  
Interaxle Diff. Lock Telltale ( page 80)  
High Beam Telltale ( page 81)  
Anti-Lock Brake System (Trailer)  
Telltale ( page 82)  
10 Air Suspension System Telltale  
( page 82)  
11 Mirror Defroster Telltale ( page 82)  
12 Right Turn Telltale ( page 80)  
Safety Belt Telltale ( page 81)  
Parking Brake Telltale ( page 81)  
NOTE! All telltales may not be used in all  
vehicles.  
The telltale strip is located below the  
tachometer and speedometer. A yellow cau-  
tion telltale indicates that there is a system  
or component in the vehicle that requires  
the operator’s attention. A red warning tell-  
tale indicates that there is a system or  
component that should be checked before  
the vehicle is driven any further.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
80 Instruments and Controls  
Left and Right Turn Telltales  
This lights up green when the turn signal is  
activated and blinks in time with the out-  
side turn signal lamps. An audible signal  
also sounds in time with the telltale. A sin-  
gle short beep is heard when the telltale  
lights up.  
W3000903  
5th Wheel Lock Telltale  
This telltale will light up yellow when the  
pneumatic switch for the 5th wheel slide  
lock is turned on. It will stay lit until the  
switch is turned to the off position again.  
See the 5th wheel uncoupling section on  
page 280 for correct use.  
W3000621  
Wheel and Interaxle Differential Lock Telltales  
These telltales will light up yellow when  
the pneumatic switches for either the wheel  
or interaxle differential lock are turned on.  
For the interaxle lock, the telltale is acti-  
vated by the switch. For the wheel lock, a  
switch in the axle turns the telltale light on  
only when the lock is actually engaged. It  
turns the light off only when the lock is ac-  
tually disengaged. See page 258 for proper  
differential lock use.  
W3000904  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and Controls 81  
High Beam Telltale  
Any time the high beams are activated, by  
the high/low beam switch or the high beam  
flash switch, the telltale lights up blue. For  
information on switching high/low beam,  
see page 91.  
W3001303  
Safety Belt Telltale  
The telltale lights up red each time the ig-  
nition is turned on to remind the driver to  
fasten the safety belt. It stays lit for 10 sec-  
onds and then goes out automatically.  
Before adjusting the safety belt, make sure  
the vehicle is stationary and that the seat  
has been adjusted as required. Do not at-  
tempt to adjust the safety belt or seat while  
the vehicle is in motion. For proper use of  
the safety belt, see page 48.  
W3000625  
Parking Brake Telltale  
The telltale lights up red when the parking  
brake valve knob is pulled out. The day-  
time running light (DRL) function is also  
dependent on the parking brake application.  
Any time the parking brake telltale is on,  
the DRL is deactivated.  
W3000627  
Never exit your vehicle unless the park-  
ing brake is set. Failure to do so can  
result in unexpected vehicle movement  
and cause personal injury or death.  
For proper use of the parking brake, see  
page 229.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
82 Instruments and Controls  
ABS Telltale, Tractor and Trailer  
The telltale lights up amber if the Anti-  
Lock Brake System (ABS) senses a  
problem under the following conditions:  
1
The system will go through its self  
test when the ignition switch is turned  
on and the telltale should continue to  
be on. The light should go out when  
the vehicle speed reaches over approx-  
imately 7 mph (11 km/h). If the  
W3000905  
telltale stays on at higher speed, there  
is a problem with the ABS.  
2
The ABS telltale lights up during driv-  
ing. The ABS self test has detected a  
fault in the system.  
The vehicle can still be driven with a prob-  
lem in the ABS. However, the ABS will not  
be operating and standard air braking is in  
effect. For more information, see page 236.  
The trailer ABS telltale is in effect for ve-  
hicles manufactured after January 2000.  
Air Suspension Telltale  
The telltale lights up amber when the sus-  
pension leveling valve is activated. As long  
as the switch is activated, the suspension is  
lower than normal and the telltale is on. For  
proper use of the suspension level control,  
see fifth wheel uncoupling on page 276.  
W3002596  
Mirror Defroster Telltale (option)  
The telltale lights up amber when the mir-  
ror defrost switch is engaged. Heater  
temperature is automatically regulated by  
an internal system in the mirror head.  
W3000632  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and Controls 83  
Right Instrument Section  
L
Forward Drive Axle Oil Temperature  
(option) ( this page)  
M
Rear Drive Axle Oil Temperature  
(option) ( this page)  
N
O
Fuel Level Gauge ( page 84)  
Application Air Pressure (option)  
( page 84)  
OR  
Air Suspension Pressure (option)  
( page 84)  
P
Q
R
Front Brake System Air Pressure  
( page 85)  
Rear Brake System Air Pressure  
( page 85)  
W3004407  
Warning Telltales ( page 86)  
L & M — Forward & Rear Drive Axle Oil Temperature (option)  
The gauges are connected to temperature  
senders installed in the axles. Normal oper-  
ating temperature range is up to 250 F  
(120 C). If average oil temperature consis-  
tently goes above 250 F (120 C), more  
frequent oil changes are needed or an oil  
cooler could be installed.  
CAUTION  
A sudden increase in oil temperature  
W3003634  
that is not caused by a load increase  
may indicate mechanical failure. Bring  
the vehicle to a safe stop where the  
problem can be checked. Do not operate  
vehicle until correcting the problem.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
84 Instruments and Controls  
N — Fuel Level Gauge  
The gauge is connected to a sending unit in  
the fuel tank. There is only one sender even  
if the vehicle is equipped with dual tanks.  
W3003628  
O — Application Air Brake Pressure (option)  
Air gauges are directly connected to the air  
brake system. They will indicate the brake  
application pressure from either the front,  
rear or trailer circuit pressure.  
The gauge will not register air pressure un-  
til the foot brake pedal is depressed or the  
trailer hand brake is applied.  
W3004302  
O — Air Suspension Pressure (option)  
Air gauges are directly connected to the air  
suspension system. It will indicate the sus-  
pension pressure in the air springs.  
The pressure shown on the gauge is a crude  
indication of the load on the rear axle(s).  
The gauge should not be used for trying to  
balance the load between the axles.  
W3003633  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and Controls 85  
P & Q — Front and Rear Brake System Air Pressures  
The system air gauges are directly con-  
nected to the front and rear circuit tanks.  
The two gauges should register equal air  
pressure. Air brake system pressure should  
be between 90 to 135 psi (620 to 930 kPa)  
for normal operation. The pointers in the  
two gauges should register equal air pres-  
sure. By observing the gauge pointers, the  
operator can detect a pressure drop if an air  
leak develops and can readily identify the  
circuit affected. See page 224 for more in-  
formation.  
W3003637  
There is a low-air warning switch in each  
gauge. If the pressure in a brake circuit air  
tank drops below approximately 60 psi  
(420 kPa), the red indicator in the lower  
right corner of the gauge will light up and  
the master warning indicator and the buzzer  
will simultaneously come on. If the air  
pressure is allowed to drop below 30 to 40  
psi (205 to 275 kPa) in both systems, the  
parking brakes will automatically engage to  
stop the vehicle. Refer to page 224 for  
more information about the brakes.  
W3000638  
Master Warning Indicator  
Failure to observe these precautions can  
result in the loss of braking performance  
and personal injury or death can occur  
as a result of a vehicle crash.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
86 Instruments and Controls  
R — Warning Telltales, Right Section  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Transmission Temperature (this page)  
Check Transmission (this page)  
Traction Control System ( page 87)  
Wait to Start (Not used)  
W3004416  
Automatic Neutral ( page 88)  
Water in Fuel (Not used)  
Transmission Temperature Telltale  
The Transmission Temperature Telltale is  
for the Allison WTEC III transmission. The  
amber warning signal lights up and a  
buzzer sounds when the transmission tem-  
perature is too high.  
W3004305  
Check Transmission Telltale  
The Check Transmission Telltale is for the  
Allison WTEC III transmission. The red  
warning signal lights up to indicate a trans-  
mission problem. Depending on the severity  
of the problem, shifts may be restricted.  
W3004306  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and Controls 87  
Traction Control System Telltale  
The amber telltale will blink only when the  
Traction Control System (TCS) mud/snow  
mode is engaged. At all other times, the  
TCS system operates in the background  
without indication. The system does not  
have an on/off switch. See page 238 for  
more information.  
W3000962  
The TCS only operates at speeds lower  
than 25 mph (40 km/h). The system detects  
wheel spin by comparing wheel speeds and  
controls the spin by using the brake system  
to transfer power to wheels with greater  
traction. Under circumstances where all  
drive wheels are spinning, the system sends  
a signal to the engine control unit to reduce  
power.  
The TCS includes a TCS mud/snow switch  
for turning the system off to increase wheel  
spin. This function may be desirable in  
deep snow or mud to keep the vehicle from  
bogging down.  
W3001336  
To operate, press in the bottom part of the  
switch. The switch stays in this position  
and the TCS telltale light blinks to indicate  
that the mud/snow mode is engaged. To re-  
turn to normal TCS operation, press the  
bottom part of the switch again and it will  
return to rest position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
88 Instruments and Controls  
Auto Neutral Telltale  
The Auto Neutral Telltale is for the Allison  
WTEC III transmission. The green indica-  
tor lights up when the transmission is in  
auto neutral. Auto neutral is activated just  
before the vehicle comes to a complete stop  
(less than 1.5 mph [2.5 km/h]). The gear is  
re-engaged shortly (1–2 seconds) after the  
brake pedal is released.  
W3004308  
Allow for the gear re-engagement when ap-  
plying throttle; do not increase engine  
speed before the transmission has engaged.  
If the engine speed is too high, the trans-  
mission will not engage.  
CAUTION  
When operating the vehicle on normal  
grades (less than 4%), a slight roll-back  
can be experienced when the brake  
pedal is released and before the trans-  
mission re-engages.  
NOTE! When operating on severe grades  
(more than 5%), the transmission has a  
safety feature that can be used. Before re-  
leasing the brake pedal, manually press the  
“DRIVE” key on the Allison gear selector,  
and the gear is re-engaged manually to as-  
sist in preventing roll-back.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and Controls 89  
Changing Telltale Bulbs In Cluster  
NOTE! Before beginning to work, make  
sure the vehicle ignition is switched OFF.  
If possible, adjust the steering column  
back. Remove the two screws at the top of  
the instrument cluster and fold the cluster  
out and let it rest face-down against the  
steering column so the bulbs are accessible.  
W3000842  
CAUTION  
Do not let the cluster be in the  
face-down position for more than maxi-  
mum 15 minutes. Damage to the gauges  
can occur by oil running out of them,  
making the gauge reading inaccurate.  
Do not use any tools for changing the bulbs  
other than the correct tool. Using a pair of  
pliers could easily cause a short-circuit if  
power is on, thereby destroying the circuit  
board.  
W3001306  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
90 Instruments and Controls  
A bulb change tool is included with the  
ignition keys on the keychain, or can be or-  
dered from your Volvo Truck dealer under  
part number 1089953. Use only this tool to  
change bulbs in the instrument cluster.  
To remove bulb, insert tool onto the bulb  
assembly, rotate a 1/4 turn counterclock-  
wise and pull the bulb assembly out of the  
cluster.  
W3000642  
Insert a new bulb into the tool and install it  
into the cluster. Rotate the bulb a 1/4 turn  
clockwise and pull the tool off of the bulb  
assembly.  
NOTE! The telltale area in the right part of  
the instrument does not use all spaces for  
active telltales. These bulbs can be used for  
spare bulbs.  
Lift up the instrument cluster and fasten the  
two screws at the top of the cluster.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and Controls 91  
Steering Column Switches  
Turn Signal/Headlight Beam Change  
The turn signal is activated by the lever un-  
der the left side of the steering wheel. If  
the vehicle is equipped with a cruise con-  
trol, the controls for this are located on the  
turn signal lever. See page 218 for more in-  
formation about the cruise control.  
The standard turn signal switch is not self  
cancelling. It must be manually returned to  
neutral position after making a turn. A self  
cancelling turn signal is available as an op-  
tion.  
For lane changes, the lever does not need  
to be moved to a locking position. Move  
the lever partway off the normal position  
until a resistance is felt. The turn signal is  
now activated and the lever will return to  
normal position when it is released.  
W2002694  
The headlight flash function is activated by  
pulling the turn signal lever toward the  
steering wheel. The high beam will stay on  
until the lever is released.  
W3000903  
To change between high and low beam,  
pull the lever all the way toward the steer-  
ing wheel. When a slight clicking sound is  
heard, release the lever.  
NOTE! When switching from high to low  
beam for oncoming traffic, release the lever  
as soon as the beam change is made. Hold-  
ing the lever up makes the headlight flash  
function stay engaged.  
W3001303  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
92 Instruments and Controls  
Windshield Wiper/Washer  
The wiper/washer functions are operated by  
the same switch. The wipers have a normal  
and a fast speed which are activated by  
moving the lever down one or two posi-  
tions. To let the wipers engage for one or  
two passes, lightly depress the lever until  
the wipers start and hold it there. The  
wipers return to the parking position when  
the lever is released.  
The interval wiper function is engaged by  
moving the lever up. The normal pro-  
grammed speed is one pass every 10  
seconds. To shorten the interval time, move  
the lever to normal wipe position and then  
to the interval position again when the next  
wiper pass is desired. In this way, the inter-  
val can be programmed between 1 to 10  
seconds between each pass.  
W3003655  
To operate the windshield washer, pull the  
lever toward the steering wheel. If washer  
fluid needs to be added, use a commercially  
reputable washer fluid that has good clean-  
ing capability and does not freeze in cold  
weather. Total reservoir capacity is 3.3 gal-  
lons (12.5 liters).  
W8000985  
An indicator will appear on the graphic dis-  
play and the yellow  
INFO telltale lights  
up when there is approximately 1.4 gallons  
(5.3 liters) remaining in the reservoir. A 10  
second activation delay allows for fluid  
slosh.  
T3008838  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and Controls 93  
Transmission Retarder  
If the vehicle is equipped with an Allison  
HD or MD transmission, the retarder lever  
is located in front of the highbeam and  
windshield wiper/washer lever. You can  
move this lever to six different positions to  
set the level.  
W3004405  
The retarder on/off switch is located in the  
dash, in the right-most position in the aux-  
iliary panel. See page 243 for more  
information.  
W3004428  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
94 Instruments and Controls  
Left Switch Cluster  
This switch cluster has only one switch po-  
sition permanently filled. Other positions  
are for optional equipment. The standard  
switch is for the Hazard Lights.  
Other switches that can be located in this  
cluster are for Back of Cab Light,  
Headlight Flash, Power Take Off, Head-  
light/Snowplow Changeover, and Fresh Air  
Intake.  
W3002002  
Hazard Lights  
The hazard or four-way warning circuit is  
activated by pressing in the bottom part of  
the switch. The indicator light in the switch  
will flash in unison with the outside lights.  
The hazard lights function independently  
from the ignition switch.  
Activate this function only when the vehi-  
cle is stopped where it might be a danger  
to other vehicles or to alert others of a  
problem that changes the traffic rhythm.  
W3001350  
Back Of Cab Light (option)  
Turn on the back of cab light by pressing  
in the bottom part of the switch. The light  
will stay on until the switch is returned to  
off-position.  
Back-of-cab lights are available as a flush-  
mounted light in the middle of the cab rear  
wall or as a high-mounted light on the side  
of the cab.  
W3001355  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and Controls 95  
Headlight Flash Switch (option)  
The headlight flash switch will momentar-  
ily turn the headlights off when pressed.  
The switch will return when released, turn-  
ing headlights on again. This switch  
functions when either of Daytime Running  
Lights or low beam headlights are on.  
W3002306  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
96 Instruments and Controls  
Power Take Off  
There are two basic types of PTOs avail-  
able: engine mounted and transmission  
mounted. The transmission mounted PTO is  
clutch dependent, which means that opera-  
tion can be regulated by depressing or  
releasing the clutch pedal. This type of  
PTO should not be in use while driving.  
The engine mounted PTO is direct-mounted  
to the engine and is engaged with a bypass  
valve operated by the switch. This type of  
PTO can be in use while driving.  
Transmission Mounted PTO  
The vehicle should be stopped before en-  
gaging power take off. Engage the PTO by  
depressing the clutch pedal and pressing in  
the bottom part of the switch. Release the  
clutch pedal to start the PTO.  
W3001994  
One or two PTOs can be run at the same  
time. Applications change depending on  
customer needs and components.  
Engine Mounted PTO  
The engine should be running at low idle  
and the vehicle should be stopped or run-  
ning at very low speed before engaging  
power take off. Engage the PTO by press-  
ing in the bottom part of the switch. The  
PTO is now in operation and hydraulic flow  
can be regulated by the engine speed.  
W3001993  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and Controls 97  
PTO Speed Adjustment  
Have the PTO engaged before adjusting the  
speed. For the PTO speed adjustment to  
function, the Cruise Control or idle adjust  
can not be active, brake and clutch pedals  
must be released, and vehicle speed must  
be under approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).  
W3002499  
To set engine speed:  
1
2
3
Set the PTO/CC switch in the ON po-  
sition.  
Use the accelerator to increase engine  
speed.  
Momentarily press the SET+ or SET-  
switch to set current engine speed.  
To increase/decrease engine speed:  
1
2
Press and release the SET+ or SET-  
toggle switch to increase/decrease  
speed in increments (increment size  
depend on programmed value).  
Press and hold the SET+ or SET- tog-  
gle switch to increase/decrease speed.  
When the switch is released, the en-  
gine speed sets at current speed.  
To resume engine speed:  
1
If the PTO function was interrupted,  
resume set speed by pressing the  
PTO/CC switch to RESUME and re-  
leasing.  
To deactivate PTO speed function:  
1
Set the PTO/CC switch to the OFF po-  
sition.  
2
3
4
Press down the service brake pedal.  
Depress the clutch pedal.  
Increase vehicle speed above PTO  
working range (typically 5 mph [8  
km/h]).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
98 Instruments and Controls  
Driving Light Switches  
Headlights  
The headlight switch controls parking lights  
and headlights. It is a two position rotary  
switch, turning on parking lights, cab  
marker lamps and taillights in the first posi-  
tion and turning on headlights in the  
second position.  
To change between high and low beam,  
pull the direction indicator lever all the way  
toward the steering wheel. When a slight  
clicking sound is heard, release the lever.  
W3000955  
NOTE! When switching from high to low  
beam for oncoming traffic, release the lever  
as soon as the beam change is made. Hold-  
ing the lever up makes the headlight flash  
function stay engaged.  
The headlight unit consists of four sealed  
beam inserts. The two outer lights are low  
and high beam, and the inner lights are  
high beam only. If the headlight burns out,  
change the whole insert.  
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) are stan-  
dard. They are automatically switched on  
when the parking brakes are released (igni-  
tion must be on) and will stay on until the  
parking brakes are engaged.  
W3004425  
NOTE! Do not use DRL at night or at any  
time visibility is reduced. DRL is not a  
substitute for the main vehicle lights when  
driving at night.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and Controls 99  
Driving and Fog Lights (option)  
Combinations of driving and fog lights can  
be mounted in standard locations in the  
aerodynamic bumper or from the underside  
of the steel bumper. These are operated by  
a switch next to the headlight switch.  
Fog and driving lights are wired so they are  
turned on only when the headlight switch is  
on. Fog lights are used with the parking  
lights and the low beam headlights. Driving  
lights are used with the high beam head-  
lights. Switching from low to high beam  
will automatically switch from fog lights to  
driving lights.  
W3001356  
Driving and fog lights should be used when  
driving conditions require additional light-  
ing. The driving or fog lights should not be  
used in traffic where they might distract  
other drivers thereby creating a safety haz-  
ard.  
If the fog/driving lights are added to the ve-  
hicle as an accessory later on, make sure the  
light controls are wired as described above.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
100 Instruments and Controls  
Right Switch Cluster  
This switch cluster can hold up to six  
optional equipment switches. Planned func-  
tions are Marker Interrupt, Traction Control  
(TCS), Exhaust or Engine Brake and  
Heated Mirrors.  
W3000972  
Marker Interrupt Switch  
The switch interrupts power to the marker  
lights when held down. When released, it  
will spring back to the ON position and re-  
turn power to the marker lights.  
W3001352  
Traction Control Switch  
If the vehicle is equipped with a Traction  
Control System (TCS), there is a switch  
that can be used for increasing wheel spin.  
This may be useful for decreasing the  
chances of getting bogged down when  
driving in heavy snow, slush or muddy con-  
ditions. See page 238 for more information.  
W3001336  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and Controls 101  
Exhaust/Engine Brake  
NOTE! It is normal for there to be a slight  
delay in the application of a vehicle speed  
retardation device. When using a device of  
this type, be sure to think ahead and ana-  
lyze conditions in order to use the device  
properly.  
When operating your tractor bob-tail  
without a trailer or on slippery roads,  
the engine brake switch must be in the  
“OFF” position. Failure to follow these  
instructions can result in loss of vehicle  
control and serious personal injury or  
death may occur.  
Failure to observe these precautions can  
result in loss of vehicle control and seri-  
ous personal injury or death can occur.  
WARNING  
A vehicle speed retardation device (such  
as “Jake Brake,” “C-Brake,” “Exhaust  
Brake,” etc.) is not intended to replace  
the service brake system on your vehicle  
nor intended to bring your vehicle to a  
stop. A vehicle speed retardation device  
is only intended to retard the speed of  
your vehicle under certain conditions.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
102 Instruments and Controls  
Several types of engine brakes can be in-  
stalled or are standard on certain engines.  
All are used to reduce wear on the vehicle  
brake linings.  
Exhaust Brake, Volvo Engine  
The exhaust brake is standard equipment on  
the Volvo engine. It provides braking effect  
to the rear wheels by trapping the exhaust  
in the engine. The switch for exhaust brake  
has two positions: ON and OFF.  
W3001324  
The exhaust brake is most effective at high  
engine speed (1 500 to 2 300 r/min). For  
proper operation, see page 240.  
Engine Brake, Volvo Engine — Optional  
The Volvo Engine Brake (VEB) is a com-  
pression brake. It works together with the  
exhaust brake to provide two levels of  
braking power. The switch has three posi-  
tions: OFF, LOW and HIGH. With the  
switch in position LOW, only the exhaust  
brake is engaged. With the switch in posi-  
tion HIGH, both the exhaust brake and  
compression brake are activated. For proper  
operation, see page 241.  
W3002303  
Jake Brake or C–Brake — Optional  
These engine brakes are similar in opera-  
tion and are compression brakes. Three  
power levels are available by engaging 2, 4,  
or 6 cylinders in the braking (for Cummins  
M11, only two power levels are available).  
W3002303  
The left of the two switches is the ON/OFF  
switch. The right switch is for selecting the  
amount of braking power with positions  
LOW, MED. and HIGH (for Cummins  
M11, only LOW and HIGH). For proper  
operation, see page 242.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and Controls 103  
Heated Mirror Switch (option)  
The vehicle can be equipped with heated  
mirrors. The switch turns on an electric  
heater element that is a part of the mirror  
glass. The heater is self regulating and will  
keep a steady temperature after reaching  
operating temperature. Both top and bottom  
mirrors are heated.  
W3003492  
Turning the switch on activates a telltale in  
the instrument cluster. The telltale will stay  
on until the switch is turned off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
104 Instruments and Controls  
Pneumatic Switch Cluster  
The pneumatic switch cluster can have up  
to four optional equipment switches. They  
regulate air flow directly to the following  
equipment: Differential Lock — Wheel and  
Interaxle, Air Suspension Level and Fifth  
Wheel Slide.  
To prevent accidental engagement, each  
switch has a latch that needs to be pressed  
down before the switch can be operated.  
W3002003  
Differential Locks (option)  
There are differential locks available for  
each driving axle (4X2 or 6X4) or between  
axles on a 6X4. The differential lock elimi-  
nates one-wheel spin-out on slippery  
surfaces and improves traction. Each switch  
has a safety latch to prevent accidental en-  
gagement. When the lock is engaged, a  
telltale lights up in the instrument cluster.  
W3001991  
Left: Wheel diff. lock  
Right: Inter-axle diff. lock  
A differential lock should only be used on  
a slippery surface and not when driving on  
good road conditions. If a differential lock  
telltale is activated in the instrument clus-  
ter, do not make turns until the telltale has  
gone out. See page 258 for information on  
how to properly engage and drive with dif-  
ferential locks engaged.  
W3000904  
Telltales  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and Controls 105  
Suspension Level  
CAUTION  
The vehicle must never be driven with  
the air springs deflated. Damage to air  
suspension parts will occur if springs are  
not inflated properly.  
Tractors with rear air suspension have a  
control for deflating the air springs. Use this  
when uncoupling from trailers. See page  
276 for correct operation when uncoupling.  
W3001341  
The switch has a safety latch to prevent ac-  
cidental engagement. Depress the latch and  
press in the bottom part of the switch to  
deflate the air springs. A telltale in the in-  
strument cluster will light up when the  
switch is in the “on” position.  
Sliding Fifth Wheel  
The release must never be operated  
while the vehicle is operating on the  
road. Fifth wheel position adjustment  
must only be done when stationary.  
Damage to the fifth wheel, trailer king-  
pin and slider may occur if not operated  
properly and may lead to an accident,  
causing serious personal injury or death.  
W3001346  
Tractors with a sliding fifth wheel mount-  
ing have an air operated release as standard  
equipment. The sliding fifth wheel is used  
for distributing loads more favorably be-  
tween the front and rear axles to comply  
with varying state and provincial laws. See  
page 280 for correct operation.  
Depress the latch and press in the bottom  
part of the switch to release the slider locks.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
106 Instruments and Controls  
Optional Switch Cluster  
The optional switch cluster can either be  
used for additional switches when the other  
clusters are used up or can be removed to  
house more radio equipment. The opening  
is a standard DIN radio slot.  
W3000973  
Generic switches are available for auxiliary  
functions that are installed by the customer.  
These should be located in the optional  
switch cluster and can be purchased from  
your local Volvo Truck dealer.  
W3002419  
Optional switches such as an Eaton Vorad  
display, Eaton Autoshift display or Allison  
Transmission Retarder can be installed, or  
the optional switch panel can be removed  
and a radio or Volvo Road Relay can be  
installed.  
W3002420  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Instruments and Controls 107  
Miscellaneous Switches  
Horn Switches  
Electric and air horns are standard equip-  
ment. They are both operated from the  
steering wheel. The air horn button (1) is  
located in the middle of the steering wheel.  
If the vehicle is equipped with an airbag  
(SRS), the airbag module can be pressed  
down anywhere around the edge to engage  
the air horn.  
There are two buttons for the electric city  
horn (2) located on the steering wheel  
spokes.  
W8000947  
Instrument Light Dimmer Switch  
The switch is a rheostat that controls the  
instrument light. Instrument light is  
activated by the headlight switch. Light in-  
tensity can be varied from off to full  
brightness by turning the rheostat clockwise  
or counterclockwise.  
W3000956  
Cigar Lighter  
To operate the cigar lighter, press in the  
center until it stays in. The heater element  
will heat up and pop the lighter out when it  
is ready for use.  
The ash tray is located next to the cigar  
lighter.  
W3000959  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
108 Graphic Display  
Graphic Display Overview  
T3010426  
The display in the bottom left-hand corner  
of the instrument cluster presents opera-  
tional information to the driver. The display  
menus and functions are selected with the  
controls on the right-hand side of the steer-  
ing wheel. Certain information will be  
shown automatically (e.g. warning mes-  
sages that need immediate attention).  
The information which is accessible varies,  
depending on whether the truck is in a  
driving or non-driving mode. Certain func-  
tions are protected by a password and are  
not shown until the correct password has  
been entered. Password protected functions  
are described in Service Manual  
Instrumentation, VN, from 3/99 and VHD”  
(see page 287 for order information).  
The display has a large number of main  
menus and sub-menus used for selecting  
the correct functions. This section describes  
each function: how the display functions  
are accessed with the controls on the wind-  
shield wiper lever and which actions are  
required by the driver when messages are  
automatically shown in the display.  
In order to control a specific function it is  
important to know which menu you are  
working in. When a function is described  
in this section, the information contains the  
menu name. For example:  
”MENU:” Set-Up Mode, Language.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Graphic Display 109  
Graphic Display Controls  
If the vehicle is in motion, use the dis-  
play controls carefully. Do not lose road  
concentration. Be familiar with operation  
of the controls. Shifting concentration to  
operating the controls can lead to losing  
control of the vehicle and may result in  
serious personal injury or death.  
The controls for the graphic display are lo-  
cated on the windshield wiper lever on the  
right-hand side of the steering wheel. The  
following commands are available:  
T3008810  
1
2
3
4
“Esc” is used to return to the previous  
menu and cancel a setting/operation.  
“Select” confirms a highlighted selec-  
tion of a menu or character.  
“Up arrow” moves the cursor up. Used  
when setting numerical values.  
“Down arrow” moves the cursor down.  
Used when setting numerical values.  
Selecting a Menu  
1
Using the up/down buttons the cursor  
is moved to the particular menu,  
which is then highlighted. A down ar-  
row in the lower right-hand corner  
shows whether there are any more  
menus available. If this is the case,  
you can continue to step down through  
the list (see the adjacent example).  
Set-up mode  
System diagnostic  
Data log mode  
Password Input  
2
3
Pressing SELECT confirms the choice.  
Pressing Esc exits the chosen menu.  
By pressing Esc repeatedly, the cursor  
is moved successively back to the  
main menus.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
110 Graphic Display  
Changing Settings  
1
The up/down buttons increase or re-  
duce the set values (e.g. hours and  
minutes in the adjacent example).  
ALARM 08:20  
CLOCK 08:00  
2
3
Pressing SELECT confirms the choice.  
ON  
OFF  
SET  
If there are several settings to change  
in the same menu, the cursor is moved  
to the next setting using the up/down  
buttons (e.g. the selection between  
ON, OFF and SET in the adjacent ex-  
ample).  
4
Esc moves the highlight to the previ-  
ous number or selection, if there are  
any, otherwise the setting is cancelled.  
Display Menus  
There are a number of main menus, each  
with sub-menus, that lists functions avail-  
able. There are two types of menus: Those  
that are available when the vehicle is in  
motion and those that can only be accessed  
when stationary. Several non-driving sub-  
menus are only accessible with a password.  
Non-Driving Mode Menus  
Set-Up Mode  
(see page 126)  
System Diagnostic  
(see page 131)  
Data Log Mode  
(see page 146)  
The password-protected menus are not cov-  
ered in this manual (see page 152).  
Password Input  
(see page 152)  
While the vehicle is stationary, there are 4  
menus in addition to the 4 drive menus.  
Also, the menu TIME/DISTANCE has one  
additional function while the vehicle is  
stationary.  
Driving Mode Menus  
GAUGE  
(see page 153)  
FUEL ECONOMY (option)  
(see page 157)  
TIME/DIST  
(see page 159)  
FAULTS?  
(see page 164)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Graphic Display 111  
Graphic Display Telltales  
W3003534  
1
2
3
Voltmeter ( page 156)  
10 Coolant level ( page 120)  
Engine oil temperature ( page 153)  
Transmission oil temperature  
( page 119)  
Preheating active ( page 72)  
Acknowledged warning ( page 124)  
Alarm clock on ( page 161)  
PTO engaged ( page 96)  
11 Washer fluid level ( page 114)  
12 Engine airfilter clogged ( page 115)  
13 Too cold for engine brake ( page 240)  
14 Overheating, instrument cluster  
( page 114)  
4
5
6
7
8
9
15 Engine preheat fault ( page 202)  
16 Engine oil pressure ( page 70)  
17 Coolant temperature ( page 69)  
Cruise control engaged ( page 218)  
Airbag (SRS) ( page 57)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
112 Graphic Display  
Information and Stop Messages  
The information and stop messages work  
together with the  
INFO or  
STOP tell-  
tales below the Graphic Display. If the  
engine is running, the buzzer will sound at  
any time the  
STOP telltale comes on.  
Information Telltale  
NOTE! When the yellow  
INFO telltale  
lights up, the indicated fault should be  
checked at the next stop.  
T3008860  
See page 113 for a listing of other telltales  
that are linked to the  
INFO telltale.  
Stop Telltale  
Failure to take necessary action when  
the STOP telltale is on, can ultimately  
result in automatic engine shutdown and  
loss of power steering assist. Vehicle  
crash resulting in personal injury or  
death can occur. Bring the vehicle to a  
safe stop where the problem can be  
checked.  
T3008861  
See page 120 for a listing of other telltales  
that are linked to the  
STOP telltale.  
More than one message can be active at the  
same time. When a new message is acti-  
vated, the new one is shown instead of the  
old. A downward pointing arrow in the  
right-hand corner of the display means that  
several messages are active.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Graphic Display 113  
Information Telltale  
General  
The yellow  
INFO telltale lights up when  
an abnormal status is detected by an elec-  
tronic control unit. A telltale or text, or  
both, are shown in the display in addition  
T3008860  
to the  
INFO telltale. For certain telltales,  
a reference value is also shown.  
The telltales are described starting on page  
114, text messages are described starting on  
page 117 and combined telltale and text  
messages are described starting on page  
119.  
Important! When this telltale lights up, the  
indicated fault should be checked at the  
next stop.  
Information messages can be put on  
standby if other information needs to be ac-  
cessed on the display. See page 124 for  
information on how to acknowledge mes-  
sages and how to recall messages.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
114 Graphic Display  
Telltales  
The yellow  
INFO lights up and a telltale  
is shown in the graphic display, describing  
in what component the problem has  
occurred:  
Airbag  
The airbag (SRS) is described on page 57.  
T3008842  
CAUTION  
The vehicle should be taken to an autho-  
rized Volvo Truck dealer immediately if  
the SRS telltale stays on or lights up  
when the vehicle is being driven.  
Instrument Cluster Overheating  
The symbol is shown when the temperature  
behind the instrument cluster is too high.  
The instrument lighting becomes weaker  
and the indicators on the instrument show a  
minimal reading. Lower the heat in the  
cab! When the heat is reduced, the instru-  
ment functions will gradually be restored.  
T3008840  
NOTE! If the temperature is too high over  
a prolonged period, the instrument cluster  
can be damaged.  
Washer Fluid Level  
The telltale lights when there is approxi-  
mately 1.4 US gallons (5.3 liters) of fluid  
remaining in the reservoir.  
T3008838  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Graphic Display 115  
Air Filter Blocked (option)  
When the telltale lights, the engine air filter  
is blocked. A blocked filter will cause  
higher fuel consumption and black smoke.  
To replace air filter, see the Operator’s  
Manual, Maintenance and Engine.  
T3008843  
Too Cold for Engine Brake (Volvo Engine Only)  
Position 2 of the engine brake should not  
be switched on until the engine has become  
warm (over 110 F [45 C]). If position 2 is  
selected and the engine is too cold, this  
symbol will be shown (however, VEB is  
not activated).  
T3009355  
Fault in Preheating  
See page 202 for more information on the  
Volvo engine preheater.  
T3008841  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
116 Graphic Display  
Transmission Oil Temperature  
This telltale lights when the transmission  
oil temperature is too high. It is shown with  
a text information about the temperature.  
See page 119 for more information.  
T3008831  
Charging System  
This telltale lights when there is a problem  
in the charging system. It is shown with  
text information of the charging system sta-  
tus. The voltage is shown together with the  
message TOO HIGH. See page 156 for  
more information.  
T3008832  
Engine Oil Temperature  
This telltale lights if the engine oil temper-  
ature becomes too high. It is shown with  
the text TOO HIGH. The engine power is  
derated. The temperature limit for activa-  
tion varies for different engines. See page  
153 for more information.  
T3008830  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Graphic Display 117  
Text  
The yellow  
INFO telltale lights up and  
information text is shown on the display.  
The text contains information on where the  
fault has occurred as well as the type of  
fault (applies to the data link):  
Factory installed equipment:  
CHECK  
ENGINE  
NEXT STOP  
T3008860  
Specific data link fault:  
CHECK  
ENGINE  
DATA LINK  
T3008860  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
118 Graphic Display  
Data link broken:  
CHECK  
DATA LINK  
BROKEN  
T3008860  
Not factory installed equipment:  
The following can be shown if equipment  
has been added by a customer and con-  
nected to the data link:  
CHECK  
ERROR IN  
MID (Message IDentifier) = controller  
MID 142  
To find more information on the data link  
diagnostic function, see page 131.  
T3008860  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Graphic Display 119  
Telltale + Text  
The yellow  
INFO telltale lights up and  
information text together with a value is  
shown on the display. The text contains in-  
formation on where the fault has occurred  
and the value will show how much above or  
below the limit the current conditions are:  
Transmission Oil Temperature  
If the transmission oil temperature becomes  
too high, the  
INFO telltale lights up  
automatically with the text HIGH. This tell-  
tale and text will come on when the oil  
temperature has been 210 F (100 C) or  
above for 30 minutes or 250 F (120 C) or  
above for 10 minutes.  
HIGH  
225 F  
T3008831  
NOTE! If the temperature goes over 285 F  
(140 C), a STOP message will be gener-  
ated; see page 123.  
T3008860  
Voltmeter  
The voltmeter value, including the text  
TOO HIGH, is automatically shown if the  
charging system voltage becomes too high.  
T3008832  
TOO HIGH  
17 V  
T3008860  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
120 Graphic Display  
Stop Telltale  
In the event of a serious fault, the red  
STOP telltale lights up and the buzzer  
sounds (if the engine is on). In addition to  
T3008861  
the  
STOP telltale, a symbol or text, or  
both, are shown in the display. A reference  
value is also shown for certain telltales.  
Telltales  
Coolant Level  
T3008851  
Failure to take necessary action when  
the STOP telltale is on, can ultimately  
result in automatic engine shutdown and  
loss of power steering assist. Vehicle  
crash resulting in personal injury or  
death can occur. Bring the vehicle to a  
safe stop where the problem can be  
checked.  
The telltale is shown if the coolant level is  
too low. During check Pre–trip (option) a  
text message is shown if the level is too  
low.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Graphic Display 121  
Engine Oil Pressure  
Failure to take necessary action when  
the STOP telltale is on, can ultimately  
result in automatic engine shutdown and  
loss of power steering assist. Vehicle  
crash resulting in personal injury or  
death can occur. Bring the vehicle to a  
safe stop where the problem can be  
checked.  
W3003613  
T3008861  
This symbol is shown when the engine oil  
pressure is too low. The LED in the gauge  
lights up together with the telltale and the  
buzzer also sounds. Depending on the en-  
gine manufacturer’s program in the ECU,  
the trip point may differ slightly for differ-  
ent engines.  
Coolant Temperature  
Failure to take necessary action when  
the STOP telltale is on can ultimately  
result in automatic engine shutdown and  
loss of power steering assist. Vehicle  
crash resulting in personal injury or  
death can occur. Bring the vehicle to a  
safe stop where the problem can be  
checked.  
W3003614  
T3008861  
The symbol is shown when the coolant  
temperature is too high.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
122 Graphic Display  
Text  
The red  
STOP telltale lights up and in-  
formation text flashes on the display. The  
buzzer sounds if the engine is running. The  
text includes information about where the  
fault has occurred:  
Failure to take necessary action when  
the STOP telltale is on, can ultimately  
result in automatic engine shutdown and  
loss of power steering assist. Vehicle  
crash resulting in personal injury or  
death can occur. Bring the vehicle to a  
safe stop where the problem can be  
checked.  
Specific data link fault:  
STOP!  
DATA LINK  
BRAKES  
Factory fitted equipment:  
STOP!  
ENGINE  
FAILURE  
Not factory fitted equipment:  
STOP!  
FAILURE IN  
MID 142  
The following is shown if the customer has  
fitted equipment which is connected to the  
data link:  
MID (Message IDentifier) = controller.  
To find more information on the data link  
diagnostic function, see page 131.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Graphic Display 123  
Telltale + Text  
The red  
STOP telltale lights up and in-  
formation text together with a value is  
shown on the display. The text contains in-  
formation on where the fault has occurred  
and the value will show how much above or  
below the limit the current conditions are:  
Warning, temperature transmission oil  
If the temperature of the transmission oil  
becomes too high, the red  
STOP telltale  
is shown automatically with the text TOO  
HIGH. This warning will come on when  
the oil temperature has been 285 F (140 C)  
or above for over 30 seconds.  
TOO HIGH  
285 F  
T3008831  
Failure to take necessary action when  
the STOP telltale is on, can ultimately  
result in automatic engine shutdown and  
loss of power steering assist. Vehicle  
crash resulting in personal injury or  
death can occur. Bring the vehicle to a  
safe stop where the problem can be  
checked.  
T3008861  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
124 Graphic Display  
Acknowledge Information and Stop Messages  
By pressing Esc, the display with the fault  
message is reset and the graphic display re-  
turns to the same status as before the error  
occurred. An acknowledged fault message  
is shown as a symbol on the right in the  
graphic display window. All types of fault  
messages can be acknowledged. Acknowl-  
edged but active messages are shown again  
when the ignition key is turned to the start  
position.  
T3008852  
Yellow INFO telltale: The text message,  
yellow  
INFO telltale and the symbol can  
be acknowledged using Esc. This warning  
is acknowledged until the next time the ig-  
nition key is turned to the start position.  
T3008860  
Exceptions: The message can be shown  
again if the fault is de-activated and then  
becomes active again.  
Example: If the engine oil temperature be-  
comes too high a message is activated  
automatically. The driver acknowledges this  
message using Esc. If the temperature then  
drops to a normal level but then becomes  
too high again the warning is activated  
again.  
Red  
STOP telltale: The buzzer, text  
message and the symbol can be acknowl-  
edged using Esc, but are active again 10  
seconds after pressing the button. The red  
STOP telltale remains lit the whole time.  
T3008861  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Graphic Display 125  
Recall  
An acknowledged fault message can be re-  
called, i.e. be shown on the graphic display  
again.  
MENU: FAULTS?  
1
SELECT confirms the choice of the  
menu FAULTS? The last acknowl-  
edged fault message is shown. If there  
is more than one message, a down ar-  
row is shown in the right-hand corner.  
2
The up/down buttons move the cursor  
between the current messages.  
If an acknowledged fault message is still ac-  
tive at the next occasion the ignition key is  
turned to the ON position this is shown as  
a non-acknowledged message. NO FAULTS  
is shown if there are no fault messages.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
126 Graphic Display  
Main Menu: Set-Up Mode  
The menu Set-up mode has 14 sub-menus  
where 6 are not protected by passwords and  
8 are protected by passwords.  
Language  
Mi/ F/USgal or km/ C  
Clock format  
Contrast  
Backlight  
Night display  
Password is required:  
(see page 152)  
Default language  
Fleet limit: r/min  
Fleet limit: speed  
Fleet fuel target  
Odometer setting  
Fleet ID  
Password config.  
Language  
MENU: Set-up mode, Language  
English  
Spanish  
French  
This setting of language applies only until  
the ignition key switch is turned off. To  
change the language permanently, a pass-  
word is required (see page 110).  
1
To set the desired language, press SE-  
LECT when you are in the menu  
Set-up mode, Language.  
2
On the graphic display up to three dif-  
ferent languages will now be shown.  
Select the desired language by moving  
the cursor to the particular row. Con-  
firm the choice with SELECT.  
Cancel setting  
Press Esc in order to cancel the setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Graphic Display 127  
Miles/ F/USgal or km/ C  
MENU: Set-up mode, Mi/ F/USgal or  
km/ C  
NOTE! If miles and Fahrenheit are chosen,  
the fuel consumption is shown in US gal-  
lons. If kilometers and Celsius are chosen,  
the consumption is shown in liters.  
1
Select the menu Set-up mode,  
Mi/ F/USgal or km/ C and the fol-  
lowing diagram is shown on the  
graphic display (with the particular  
setting highlighted):  
km and C  
The up/down buttons move the cursor  
between the alternatives.  
Mi/USgal and F  
2
3
Confirm the choice with SELECT.  
When km and C are chosen, the  
following is shown on the graphic dis-  
play (with the particular setting  
highlighted):  
The up/down buttons move the cursor  
between the alternatives.  
Select  
fuel data unit  
4
Confirm the choice with SELECT.  
km/l  
l/100  
km  
Cancel setting  
Press Esc in order to cancel the setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
128 Graphic Display  
Clock format  
MENU: Set-up mode, Clock format  
1
Select the menu Set-up mode, Clock  
format and the following diagram is  
shown on the graphic display (with the  
particular setting highlighted):  
AM/PM  
24 h  
2
The up/down buttons move the cursor  
between the alternatives. Confirm the  
choice with SELECT.  
AM/PM is the 12 hour display (AM =  
morning and PM = evening).  
Cancel setting  
Press Esc in order to cancel the setting.  
Contrast  
MENU: Set-up mode, Contrast  
1
Select the menu Contrast and the fol-  
lowing diagram is shown on the  
graphic display. The bar shows the  
particular setting in relation to  
max/min. contrast:  
Adjust contrast  
The up arrow increases the contrast.  
The down arrow reduces the contrast.  
Confirm the choice with SELECT.  
2
Cancel setting  
Press Esc in order to cancel the setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Graphic Display 129  
Backlight  
MENU: Set-up mode, Backlight  
NOTE! This setting affects the display  
brightness when the headlights or parking  
lights are on. When the exterior lights are  
off, the brightness on the display is con-  
stant.  
Adjust lighting  
The graphic display brightness is controlled  
by the dimmer rheostat setting (which also  
controls the other instrument cluster light-  
ing). In this menu, the display lighting can  
be altered in relation to the other instru-  
ment cluster lighting.  
1
Select the menu Backlight and the  
following diagram is shown on the  
graphic display. The bar shows the  
particular setting in relation to  
max/min. lighting:  
the up arrow button increases the  
background lighting.  
the down arrow button reduces the  
background lighting.  
2
Confirm the choice with SELECT.  
1 =  
2 =  
3 =  
off.  
parking lamps.  
high and low beam.  
Cancel setting  
Press Esc in order to cancel the setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
130 Graphic Display  
Night display  
MENU: Set-up mode, Night display  
1
Select the menu Night display and the  
following diagram is shown on the  
display:  
Night display  
Normal  
2
With the up/down buttons the setting  
switches between Normal and Re-  
verse. With the setting Normal the text  
is dark and the background light. The  
setting Reverse makes the text light  
and the background dark. This setting  
only applies when the headlights or  
parking lights are on.  
Reverse  
3
Confirm the choice with SELECT.  
Cancel setting  
Press Esc in order to cancel the setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Graphic Display 131  
Main Menu: System Diagnostic  
The menu System diagnostic has 3 sub-  
menus which are not protected by a  
password, and 1 sub-menu which is pro-  
tected by a password.  
Fault diagnostic  
Cluster self test  
Part number  
Password required:  
(see page 152)  
Status test  
Fault Diagnostic  
MENU: Diagnostic, Fault diagnostic  
A list of the vehicle’s ECUs is shown in  
the menu Fault diagnostic. Each ECU is  
identified by a MID number (Message  
IDentifier). In addition a menu for resetting  
all the fault codes is shown.  
For a list of common fault codes, see page  
137.  
ABS Brakes, MID 136  
Instrument cluster center module,  
MID 140  
Info Display (instrument cluster  
graphic display), MID 234  
SRS Airbag, MID 232  
Cab controller (Vehicle ECU),  
MID 144  
Engine, MID 128  
Non specified system  
Reset all (password)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
132 Graphic Display  
1
2
3
The up/down buttons are used to  
move the cursor in the list.  
SELECT confirms the selection of  
ECU or Reset all.  
During the time that each respective  
ECU is being called, the display  
shows the text:  
Data transfer  
in progress  
please wait  
4
5
6
No faults in the chosen system:  
Press Esc to return to the previous  
menu.  
No errors  
Not responding to Non spec. system:  
Non spec. syst  
Press Esc to return to the previous  
menu.  
MID (127)  
Not responding  
If the chosen system does not respond  
within 5 seconds the following mes-  
sage is shown (in this example the  
engine has been called):  
Engine  
MID 128  
Not responding  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Graphic Display 133  
Fault codes are shown  
1
If there is a fault code or codes the  
following is shown, for example:  
Engine  
Coolant temperature  
Value too high  
Active  
Identification of ECU  
Line 1:  
Line 2: Identification of parame-  
ter/component  
Line 3: Fault type identification  
1
I
1” shows how many times the fault has  
been registered since the last resetting. If  
no information is available for how many  
times the fault code has been registered,  
only Active is shown (the fault remains). Or  
alternatively Inactive is shown (the fault  
was there previously).  
The arrow in the lower, right-hand corner is  
shown if there is more than one fault code.  
The up/down buttons move the cursor and  
the next fault code/message is shown. To  
reset codes, a password must be entered  
(see page 152).  
2
If more than 20 fault codes/messages  
are available for the chosen ECU the  
21st message will be:  
Engine  
Too many  
error messages  
To see those messages that are not  
shown, earlier messages must be reset  
(see above). The fault codes are pre-  
sented in text format, but the user can  
also choose to have the fault codes  
presented numerically (if a fault code  
or ECU is not recognized by the sys-  
tem, they will only be presented in  
numeric format).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
134 Graphic Display  
Numeric or text  
1
Press SELECT when there are fault  
codes and the following menu is  
shown. Select numeric or text format  
(the function Reset will only be shown  
when the correct password has been  
entered; see page 152):  
Numeric  
Text  
Time stamp  
Reset  
2
3
When Text has been selected, the fault  
codes are shown according to step no.  
1, page 133.  
When Numeric has been selected the  
fault codes are shown with numbers:  
MID 128  
PID 110  
MID: Identification of ECU  
FMI 0  
Active  
PID: Identification of parameter  
Volvo unique identification  
of parameter  
PPID:  
1
I
Identification of component  
SID:  
Volvo unique identification  
of component  
PSID:  
Identification of fault type  
FMI:  
1” shows how many times the fault  
occurred since the last resetting. If  
there is no information available for  
how many times the fault code has  
been active, only Active is shown (the  
fault remains) or Inactive (the fault  
was there previously).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Graphic Display 135  
The arrow in the lower, right-hand  
corner is shown if there is more than  
one fault code. The up/down buttons  
move the cursor and the next fault  
code is shown. If the correct password  
has been entered, resetting can be  
done in Reset all, last in the list. This  
resetting deletes only the fault codes  
for the chosen ECU.  
4
If more than 20 fault codes/messages  
are available for the chosen ECU, the  
21st message will be:  
Too many  
error messages  
To see those messages that are not  
shown, earlier messages must be reset  
(password restricted, see page 152).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
136 Graphic Display  
Time stamp  
1
To show the time when the fault code  
was set for the first and latest occasion  
respectively, press SELECT when the  
particular fault code is presented (does  
not apply to ABS brakes or SRS  
Numeric  
Text  
Time stamp  
Reset  
airbag). The following menu is shown:  
2
3
Select Time stamp and the following  
text message is shown:  
Data transfer  
in progress  
please wait  
The following is shown (time stamp is  
presented as the number of hours the  
engine has been running):  
First  
X
Press Esc to return to the previous  
menu.  
Last  
X
4
If the transfer should fail, the follow-  
ing message is shown:  
First  
No data  
Last  
No data  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Graphic Display 137  
Common Fault Codes  
MID Messages Supported (with text)  
PID  
Description  
code  
MID  
code  
Description  
62  
Retarder inh status  
Idle shutdown status  
Road speed  
128  
130  
136  
140  
144  
232  
Engine  
71  
Transmission  
ABS  
84  
91  
% Throttle pedal  
100  
102  
105  
106  
108  
110  
111  
127  
160  
161  
175  
177  
190  
191  
Engine oil pressure  
Boost pressure  
Instrument  
Cab Controller  
SRS (Airbag)  
Air inlet temperature  
Air inlet pressure  
Barometric pressure  
Engine coolant temperature  
Coolant level  
Additional MID Messages (without  
text)  
137  
138  
138  
141  
162  
166  
171  
172  
179  
181  
191  
231  
Brakes, Trailer #1  
Brakes, Trailer #2  
Brakes, Trailer #3  
Transmission oil psi  
Main shaft speed  
Trip Recorder  
Vehicle Navigation Unit  
Tires, Power Unit  
Input shaft speed  
Engine oil temperature  
Transmission oil temperature  
Engine speed  
Driver Information Center  
Off-board Diagnostics #1  
Data Logging Computer  
Communication Unit - Satellite  
Vehicle Location Unit  
Transm. output RPM  
PSID (Proprietary Subsystem ID)  
PSID  
Code  
Description  
Communications Unit - Satel-  
lite/GPS/Cellular  
PSID 1 Retarder Brake Control Set  
Switch  
SRS  
SID  
Description  
PSID 2 Idle Validation Switch #2  
PSID 3 Idle Validation Switch #3  
PSID 4 Retarder Brake Control Switch  
1
Driver Airbag Ign. Loop  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
138 Graphic Display  
Common Description  
SID code  
Transm. Description  
SID code  
233  
236  
237  
242  
243  
244  
245  
246  
247  
248  
249  
250  
251  
252  
253  
254  
Controller #2  
1
2
C1 solenoid valve  
Power contact device  
Start enable solenoid  
CC resume switch  
CC set switch  
C2 solenoid valve  
3
C3 solenoid valve  
4
C4 solenoid valve  
5
C5 solenoid valve  
CC enable switch  
Clutch pedal switch  
Brake pedal switch #1  
Brake pedal switch #2  
Proprietary data link  
SAE J1922 data link  
SAE J1708 data link  
Power supply  
6
C6 solenoid valve  
7
Lockup solenoid valve  
Neutral start output  
Shift selector #1  
16  
18  
27  
28  
29  
30  
Lockup clutch PSI sw.  
Forward range PSI sw.  
Neutral range PSI sw.  
Reverse range PSI sw.  
Calibration module  
Calibration memory  
Controller #1  
Vehicle  
Naviga-  
tion SID  
code  
Description  
Engine  
SID code  
Description  
1
2
3
Dead reckoning  
LORAN receiver  
1
2
Injector #1  
Global positioning system  
(GPS)  
Injector #2  
3
Injector #3  
4
Integrated navigation unit  
4
Injector #4  
5
Injector #5  
6
Injector #6  
21  
22  
25  
Engine position sensor  
Timing sensor  
Ext. engine protection sig.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Graphic Display 139  
Brake  
SID code  
Description  
FMI  
code  
Description  
1
2
ABS snsr axle 1 L  
ABS snsr axle 1 R  
ABS snsr axle 2 L  
ABS snsr axle 2 R  
ABS snsr axle 3 L  
ABS snsr axle 3 R  
ABS valve axle 1 L  
ABS valve axle 1 R  
ABS valve axle 2 L  
ABS valve axle 2 R  
ABS valve axle 3 L  
ABS valve axle 3 R  
ABS rtrdr ctrl relay  
ABS relay, diagonal 1  
ABS relay, diagonal 2  
ABS, dif 1 - ASR valve  
ABS, dif 2 - ASR valve  
Speed signal input  
Warning light bulb  
ASR light bulb  
0
1
Data valid, but high  
Data valid, but low  
Data erratic  
3
2
4
3
Voltage shorted high  
Voltage shorted low  
Current low or open C  
Current high or short C  
Mech syst no respons  
Abnormal freq or PW  
Abnormal update rate  
Abnormal change rate  
Failure unknown  
5
4
6
5
7
6
8
7
9
8
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
18  
19  
22  
23  
24  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
Bad device  
Out of calibration  
Special instruction1  
1
This is displayed when the airbag has stored  
crash data or by the data concentrator when the  
engine shutdown output has been activated.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
140 Graphic Display  
PPID (Proprietary Parameter ID)  
PPID Description  
Code  
69  
70  
71  
Buffered Idle Switch  
Pedal Switches, Supply  
Cruise Control and Retarder,  
Supply Switch  
72  
73  
75  
Accelerator Pedal and Retarder,  
Supply Sensors  
Accelerator Control 2 and Pri-  
mary Tank, Supply Sensors  
Range Inhibitor, Status Sole-  
noid Valve  
76  
77  
Brake Lamps, Status Relay  
Compressor, Status Solenoid  
Valve  
78  
79  
Interval Wiper, Status Relay  
Area Inhibitor, Status Solenoid  
Valve  
86  
Engine Brake Torque Percent  
EPG3 Drive Stage Failure  
109  
121  
MTE (Engine Compressor  
Control Output) Failure  
122  
VCB Engine Compression  
Brake  
123  
124  
125  
195  
EPG2 Start and Warmhold  
EPG1 Engine Brake  
EOL Enable Failure  
Proprietary Diagnostic Data  
Request/Clear Count  
196  
Proprietary Diagnostic  
Data/Count Clear Response  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Graphic Display 141  
Cluster Self-Test  
MENU: System diagnostics, cluster self-  
test  
Four sub-menus are available:  
Bulb test  
Gauge test  
Display test  
Buzzer test  
Cancel Test  
Press Esc in order to cancel the test.  
Bulb Test  
MENU: System diagnostic, Cluster self-  
test, Bulb test  
1
2
Select Bulb test.  
The telltale lamps light up for approx.  
5 seconds.  
3
Esc cancels the test and the menu  
Bulb test is shown again.  
Changing Bulbs  
Changing the instrument cluster’s telltale  
bulbs can be carried out from the rear side,  
without the instrument cluster needing to  
be opened. See page 89 for replacement  
information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
142 Graphic Display  
Gauge test  
MENU: System diagnostics, Cluster self-  
test, Gauge test  
1
2
Select Gauge test.  
The pointers move back and forth a  
few times, between the end positions.  
They stop at the mid-point of the  
gauge before the test is complete, then  
return to zero. This is only a check  
that they can move (i.e. that the gauge  
functions).  
3
Esc cancels the test and the menu  
Gauge test is shown again.  
Display test  
MENU: System diagnostic, Cluster self-  
test, Display test  
1
2
Select Display test.  
The display goes out, lights up, goes  
out. In the odometer display, all seg-  
ments are shown, then off, back on, off  
again, and back to the normal display.  
3
Esc cancels the test and the menu Dis-  
play test is shown again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Graphic Display 143  
Buzzer test  
MENU: System diagnostic, Cluster self-  
test, Buzzer test  
1
2
Select Buzzer test.  
On the display, the name of the cur-  
rent sound is shown at the same time  
as the sound is activated. With the  
up/down buttons you can switch be-  
tween the different sounds.  
Three different sounds (flasher indica-  
tor, reminder and caution) are tested  
for 10 seconds.  
The caution sound is connected to the red  
STOP telltale.  
3
Esc cancels the test and the menu  
Buzzer test is shown again.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
144 Graphic Display  
Part number  
MENU: System diagnostics, Part number  
A list of the vehicle’s electronic control  
units (ECUs) is shown in the menu Part  
number. Each ECU is identified by a MID  
number (Message IDentifier).  
ABS Brakes, MID 136  
Instrument cluster center module, MID  
140  
Display, MID 234  
SRS Airbag, MID 232  
Vehicle ECU, MID 144  
Engine, MID 128  
1
2
3
The up/down buttons are used to  
move the cursor in the list.  
SELECT confirms the selection of an  
ECU.  
In the meantime, the display shows the  
text:  
Data transfer  
in progress  
please wait  
4
The following text is presented:  
SW: The software part number  
MID 128  
SW ID  
03163028P01  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Graphic Display 145  
5
6
The up/down buttons are used to  
move the cursor in the list.  
MID 128  
HW ID  
VOLVO08192949P06  
HW: ECU part number  
If there is a communication error, the  
following is shown No data (this ex-  
ample shows HW ID, but same text  
applies to SW ID exept that HW is re-  
placed by SW):  
MID 128  
No data  
HW ID  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
146 Graphic Display  
Main Menu: Data Log Mode (Volvo Engine Only)  
Menu Data log mode has 4 sub-menus  
where 3 are not protected by passwords and  
1 is protected by a password.  
Vehicle ID  
Totals  
Trip data  
Password required:  
(see page 152)  
Reset trip data  
Vehicle ID  
MENU: Data log mode, Vehicle ID  
1
Select the menu Data log mode, Vehi-  
cle ID and the following text message  
is shown:  
Data transfer  
in progress  
please wait  
2
The fleet ID that is shown has been  
entered in the menu.  
Fleet ID:  
XXX  
Press Esc to return to the previous  
menu.  
Chassis no:  
XXX  
3
If the transfer should fail, the follow-  
ing message is shown:  
Operation  
failed  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Graphic Display 147  
Totals  
MENU: Data log mode, Totals  
1
Select the menu Data log mode, To-  
tals.  
2
The menus that show Totals can be  
scrolled to using the up/down but-  
tons.  
Total distance  
406.7 mi  
NOTE! If km and C has been selected, the  
consumption is shown in liters.  
Total fuel used  
51.3 gal  
Total engine  
hours  
7.3 h  
Total idle  
time  
0.3 h  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
148 Graphic Display  
Total PTO  
hours  
0.5 h  
Total engine revolutions  
1 220 100 r  
3
If the transfer should fail, the follow-  
ing message is shown:  
Operation  
failed  
Cancel operation  
Press Esc in order to cancel the operation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Graphic Display 149  
Trip data (Volvo engine only)  
MENU: Data log mode, Trip data  
1
2
Select the menu Data log mode, Trip.  
The information below can be scrolled  
to using the up/down buttons.  
Trip distance  
203.5 mi  
NOTE! If Miles and F has been se-  
lected, the consumption is shown in  
US gallons.  
Trip fuel  
Avg. 28 l/100 km  
Acc. 57.0 gal  
Trip overrevs  
0.8 h  
Trip uneconomy rev’s  
0.4 h  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
150 Graphic Display  
NOTE! If km and C has been se-  
lected, the consumption is shown in  
liters.  
Trip fuel  
uneconomy rev’s  
8.5 gal  
Trip average speed  
67.4 km/h  
Trip overspeed  
0.2 h  
Trip engine hours  
3.0 h  
Trip idle time  
0.4 h  
NOTE! If km and C has been se-  
lected, the consumption is shown in  
liters.  
Trip idle fuel  
2.5 gal  
Trip PTO hours  
1.3 h  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Graphic Display 151  
NOTE! If km and C has been se-  
lected, the consumption is shown in  
liters.  
Trip PTO fuel  
20.4 gal  
Trip cruise  
2.5 h  
4
If the transfer should fail, the follow-  
ing message is shown:  
Operation  
failed  
Cancel operation  
Press Esc in order to cancel the operation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
152 Graphic Display  
Main Menu: Password Input  
Certain functions are password protected  
and there are two password levels for the  
display (it is also possible to select not to  
protect functions with password, which can  
be done by a Volvo Truck dealer):  
1
2
Workshop password  
Owner password  
The two passwords give the user access to  
all password protected functions, with one  
exception:  
The workshop password does not give ac-  
cess to the password configuration, i.e. it is  
not possible to change the Owner password  
or the Workshop password with it.  
The following menus are protected by pass-  
word:  
Default language  
Fleet limit: r/min  
Fleet limit: speed  
Fleet fuel target  
Amperemeter calibr  
Fleet id  
Reset (applicable for several functions)  
Status test  
Password config.  
When the start key has been in stop posi-  
tion for more than 60 seconds, or if the  
batteries have been disconnected, the pass-  
word must be entered again.  
The password protected menus are de-  
scribed in the Service Manual  
Instrumentation, VN, from 3/99 and VHD.”  
Order information can be found on page  
287.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Graphic Display 153  
Main Menu: Gauge  
When the menu GAUGE has been se-  
lected, you switch between the various  
sub-menus with the up/down buttons.  
TEMPERATURE, ENGINE OIL  
TEMPERATURE, TRANSMISSION  
OIL (Option)  
VOLTMETER  
Temperature, engine oil  
MENU: GAUGE, TEMPERATURE EN-  
GINE OIL  
The engine oil temperature is shown as in  
the diagram.  
T3008830  
185 F  
If the sensor data for Temperature, engine  
oil is not available, the symbol is shown as  
well as the text NO DATA.  
NO  
T3008830  
DATA  
Information message  
Yellow  
INFO telltale  
If the engine oil temperature becomes too  
high, an information message is shown au-  
tomatically with the text HIGH. At the  
HIGH  
T3008830  
same time the yellow  
der the display lights up. Esc acknowledges  
the info message.  
INFO telltale un-  
210 F  
T3008860  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
154 Graphic Display  
Temperature, transmission oil (option)  
MENU: GAUGE, TEMPERATURE,  
TRANSMISSION OIL  
The transmission oil temperature is shown  
as in the diagram.  
T3008831  
170 F  
NOTE! The temperature display starts  
showing only at approximately 150 F  
(65 C).  
NO  
DATA  
T3008831  
If the sensor data for Transmission oil  
temperature is not available, the symbol is  
shown as well as the text NO DATA.  
Information message  
Yellow  
INFO lamp  
If the temperature of the transmission oil  
becomes too high, an information message  
is shown automatically with the text HIGH.  
HIGH  
250 F  
T3008831  
At the same time the yellow  
INFO  
telltale under the display lights up. Esc ac-  
knowledges the information message.  
For HIGH to display with the  
INFO tell-  
tale, the transmission oil temperature must  
be 210 F (100 C) for 30 minutes, or 250 F  
(120 C) for 10 minutes.  
T3008860  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Graphic Display 155  
Stop message  
Red  
STOP telltale  
If the temperature of the transmission oil  
becomes too high, a flashing stop message  
is shown automatically with the text TOO  
TOO HIGH  
T3008831  
HIGH. At the same time the red  
STOP  
285 F  
telltale under the display lights up and the  
warning signal sounds. Esc acknowledges  
the stop message.  
For TOO HIGH to display with the  
STOP telltale, the transmission oil tem-  
perature must be 285 F (140 C) for 30  
seconds.  
T3008861  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
156 Graphic Display  
Voltmeter  
MENU: GAUGE, VOLTMETER  
The battery/charging voltage is shown as in  
the diagram. If the battery/charging voltage  
becomes too low (below 9.5 V), the instru-  
ment cluster will lose power.  
T3008832  
13.1 V  
Information message  
Yellow  
INFO telltale  
If the battery/charging voltage becomes too  
high, the voltmeter’s value is shown auto-  
matically as well as the text TOO HIGH.  
TOO HIGH  
17.9 V  
T3008832  
At the same time the yellow  
INFO tell-  
tale under the display lights up.  
T3008860  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Graphic Display 157  
Main Menu: Fuel Economy (option)  
Menu FUEL ECONOMY has 2 sub-  
menus:  
AVG/INST  
LEG FUEL  
FUEL ECONOMY is chosen and then the  
up/down buttons are used in order to  
change between the available sub-menus.  
AVG/INST Fuel Economy  
MENU: FUEL ECONOMY, AVG/INST  
AVG  
9.9  
For setting metric or English value dis-  
plays, see page 126.  
INST  
8.0  
The following is shown on the display:  
Average trip fuel consumption (AVG):  
TARGET  
The value is presented numerically  
and as an arrow above the bar. The ar-  
row’s position shows the value. For a  
short time after resetting, the following  
is shown “— — — “ instead of the  
average fuel consumption.  
mpg  
Instantaneous fuel consumption  
(INST):  
The value is presented numerically as  
well as in the form of a bar.  
Target trip fuel consumption (TAR-  
GET):  
The value is presented as an arrow un-  
der the bar. The arrow’s position  
shows the value. This value is pass-  
word protected, see page 152.  
NOTE! When idling, the bar is not shown  
and the fuel consumption is shown in  
gal/hour.  
NOTE! If km and C have been selected  
the consumption is shown in liters. In the  
example above, L/100 km will then be  
shown instead of mpg.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
158 Graphic Display  
Reset fuel economy  
1
Press SELECT in the menu  
AVG/INST.  
RESET  
FUEL DATA?  
2
A new text message in the form of a  
question is shown:  
RESET FUEL DATA? Press SELECT  
to reset.  
PRESS SELECT FOR 1S  
When the leg’s fuel consumption is reset,  
the average fuel consumption will also be  
reset.  
Leg Fuel  
MENU: FUEL ECONOMY, LEG FUEL  
Press the up/down buttons in the menu  
AVG/INST to reach the menu LEG FUEL.  
The following is shown in the menu LEG  
FUEL on the display:  
LEG FUEL  
XXX  
The Leg fuel consumption (amount of  
fuel used since the last resetting).  
EMPTY XXX mi  
Empty XXX mi (where XXX is the  
calculated range using the present in-  
stantaneous consumption).  
NOTE! If km and C have been selected,  
the consumption is shown in liters. In the  
example below, L will then be shown in-  
stead of USgal.  
NOTE! Since the ”calculated range” is  
based on the instantaneous consumption,  
the correct value is first shown shortly after  
start.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Graphic Display 159  
Main Menu: Time/Distance  
Menu TIME/DIST has 4 sub-menus.  
CLOCK  
ALARM CLOCK  
TRIPMETER  
AVERAGE SPEED  
NOTE! Menu TIME/DIST is available  
even when the ignition key is in the off po-  
sition. It is activated by keeping one of the  
control buttons on the wiper stalk pressed  
down for at least 1 second. The menu re-  
mains active for 30 seconds after the last  
depressing of the button.  
The alarm clock cannot be set while driv-  
ing, but the buzzer which sounds for the  
alarm call can be switched off, see page  
162.  
Clock  
MENU: TIME/DIST, CLOCK  
Shows the current time. To set the time for-  
mat 12h or 24h, see page 128.  
Setting  
1
To set the clock, press SELECT when  
you are in the menu  
TIME/DISTANCE and the clock  
function will be shown.  
2
3
Set the hours with the up/down  
buttons. Confirm the choice with SE-  
LECT.  
Set the first digit in the minutes with  
the up/down buttons. Confirm the  
choice with SELECT.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
160 Graphic Display  
4
5
Set the second digit in the minutes  
with the up/down buttons. Confirm the  
choice with SELECT.  
Set the AM/PM (if the time format is  
12h) with the up/down buttons. Con-  
firm the choice with SELECT.  
12:00  
Cancel setting  
When setting hours, Esc cancels the setting  
and the time is shown according to the pre-  
vious setting.  
Pressing Esc after setting the minutes or af-  
ter setting the AM/PM, moves the cursor  
back to the previous selection.  
Ignition key in the off position  
When the ignition key is in the OFF posi-  
tion, if setting the clock takes more than 30  
seconds between pushing the buttons, the  
time which has been entered then applies.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Graphic Display 161  
Alarm clock  
MENU: TIME/DIST, ALARM CLOCK  
Setting the alarm clock:  
1
2
To set the alarm clock, press SELECT  
when the menu ALARM CLOCK is  
shown in the menu TIME/DIST.  
ALARM 08:30 AM  
CLOCK 08:00 AM  
Move the cursor to SET using the  
up/down buttons. Press SELECT.  
ON  
OFF SET  
If the speed during the setting exceeds  
5 mph (8km/h), the function is can-  
celled and the graphic display returns  
to the last active display in the ON po-  
sition.  
3
4
5
6
7
Set the hours with the up/down  
buttons. Confirm the choice with SE-  
LECT.  
Set the first digit in the minutes with  
the up/down buttons. Confirm the  
choice with SELECT.  
Set the second digit in the minutes  
with the up/down buttons. Confirm the  
choice with SELECT.  
Set the AM/PM (if the format is 12h)  
with the up/down buttons. Confirm the  
choice with SELECT.  
Move the cursor to ON using the  
up/down buttons. Press SELECT. A  
symbol is shown on the right in the  
graphic display window’s status bar in  
order to highlight that the alarm clock  
is activated.  
T3008833  
8
Esc moves the highlight to the previ-  
ous number or selection, if there are  
any, otherwise the setting is cancelled.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
162 Graphic Display  
Ignition key in the off position  
When the ignition key is in the OFF posi-  
tion, if setting the alarm clock takes more  
than 30 seconds, the time which has been  
entered then applies.  
Switch off the alarm clock  
When the alarm clock goes off, the word  
ALARM flashes, the current time is shown  
and a warning signal sounds. The alarm is  
switched off after 60 seconds or when the  
up, down, Esc or SELECT control button is  
pressed.  
Activate alarm clock (without changing the time of the alarm call)  
1
2
The cursor is moved with the up/down  
buttons to ON.  
ALARM 08:30 AM  
CLOCK 08:00 AM  
T3008833  
SELECT activates the alarm clock and  
the symbol is shown on the graphic  
display.  
ON  
OFF SET  
Cancel setting  
Press Esc in order to cancel the setting.  
De-activate the alarm clock  
1
The cursor is moved with the up/down  
buttons to OFF.  
ALARM 08:30 AM  
CLOCK 08:00 AM  
2
SELECT switches off the alarm clock  
and the symbol disappears from the  
graphic display.  
ON  
OFF SET  
Cancel setting  
Press Esc in order to cancel the setting.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Graphic Display 163  
Tripmeter  
MENU: TIME/DIST, TRIPMETER  
TRIP  
On the display in the menu TRIPMETER  
the distance driven for Leg 1 and Leg 2 are  
shown.  
#1  
#2  
43.6 mi  
507.3 mi  
Reset tripmeter  
1
Press SELECT in the menu TRIPME-  
TER.  
RESET?  
2
A new text message with a question  
about the resetting of the tripmeter is  
shown. The up/down buttons move the  
cursor between Leg 1 and Leg 2. Con-  
firm the choice with SELECT or press  
Esc in order to cancel the resetting.  
#1:  
#2:  
PRESS SELECT FOR 1S  
Average speed  
MENU: TIME/DIST, AVERAGE SPEED  
AVERAGE  
SPEED  
The average speed is calculated using the  
distance driven divided by the time the en-  
gine has been running (since the last  
resetting).  
55.4 mph  
Reset average speed  
1
Press SELECT when the menu AV -  
ERAGE SPEED is shown.  
RESET?  
2
A new text message with a question  
about the resetting of the average  
speed is shown. Confirm the choice  
with SELECT or press Esc in order to  
cancel the resetting.  
PRESS SELECT FOR 1S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
164 Graphic Display  
Main Menu: FAULTS?  
General  
When a fault occurs a fault message is  
shown on the graphic display. There are  
two types of fault messages:  
1
2
Information messages  
Stop messages  
The stop message is always more urgent  
than information messages.  
Any information and stop messages as well  
as the associated symbols are shown auto-  
matically on the graphic display when  
driving. A summary of these symbols is  
shown in the illustration under page 166.  
Under the display there are two lamps (a  
yellow  
INFO telltale and a red  
STOP  
telltale) that attract the driver’s attention  
when necessary. When the red (stop) tell-  
tale lights up and the engine is running, a  
warning signal is also activated.  
Several messages may be active at the same  
time. When a new message is activated the  
new one is shown instead of the old one.  
A down arrow in the graphic display’s  
right-hand corner means that more mes-  
sages are active.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Graphic Display 165  
Information message  
The yellow  
INFO telltale lights up when  
an abnormal state or a risk situation is indi-  
cated. In addition to the telltale, a symbol  
or text is shown on the graphic display at  
the same time. For certain symbols, a mea-  
surement value is also shown.  
T3008860  
NOTE! In the event of a warning for low  
air pressure no message is shown on the  
graphic display, the LED in the gauge  
lights up instead (together with the master  
warning telltale [see page 78]).  
Important! When the  
INFO telltale  
lights up, the specified fault must be  
checked at the next stop.  
Stop message  
In the event of serious faults, the red  
STOP telltale lights up and a warning  
buzzer sounds (if the engine is running). In  
addition to the telltale, a symbol or text is  
shown on the graphic display at the same  
time. For certain symbols, a measurement  
value is also shown.  
T3008861  
NOTE! In the event of a warning for low  
oil pressure or coolant temperature in the  
engine no text is shown on the display —  
the LED in the respective gauge lights up  
instead.  
WARNING  
When the STOP telltale lights up the  
vehicle must be stopped immediately.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
166 Graphic Display  
Information symbols  
The yellow  
INFO telltale lights up and a  
symbol is shown on the graphic display:  
Airbag  
For airbag (SRS sys-  
Warning, trans-  
mission oil  
temperature  
tem) information, see  
T3008842  
page 57.  
If the temperature of  
the transmission oil be-  
comes too high, an  
information message is  
shown automatically  
with the text HIGH. It  
comes on when the  
Overheating, in-  
struments  
The symbol will be  
shown when the tem-  
perature in the  
instrument cluster ex-  
ceeds 92 C (198 F).  
The instrument lighting  
T3008831  
transmission oil is  
250 F (120 C) or over  
for more than 10 min-  
utes, or 210 F (100 C)  
or over for more than  
30 minutes. The tem-  
perature is displayed  
along with the symbol.  
T3008840  
becomes weaker and  
the gauges show the  
minimum reading.  
When the cab tempera-  
ture cools the  
instrument cluster func-  
tions will gradually be  
restored.  
Warning, volt-  
meter  
If the battery voltage  
becomes too high the  
voltmeter’s value is  
Level, washer  
fluid  
shown automatically as  
well as the text TOO  
HIGH. This warning is  
triggered at 17 V. The  
voltage is displayed  
along with the symbol.  
The symbol is shown  
when there are approx.  
1.4 gallons (5.3 liters)  
of fluid remaining in  
the reservoir.  
T3008832  
T3008838  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Graphic Display 167  
Too cold for en-  
gine brake  
Warning, tem-  
perature engine  
oil  
If the engine oil tem-  
perature becomes too  
high, a stop message is  
shown automatically  
with the text TOO  
(VEB) (Volvo  
engine only)  
Position 2 on the  
switch must not be en-  
gaged before the engine  
has reached operational  
T3008830  
temperature. If position  
T3009913  
HIGH. The engine out-  
put is reduced. The  
2 is engaged and the  
engine is too cold, this  
symbol is shown and a  
signal sounds when en-  
gine braking is carried  
out (However, VEB is  
not engaged).  
temperature limit which  
activates this warning  
varies for different en-  
gines. This limit is set  
in the engine ECU.  
Air filter,  
clogged  
The symbol is shown  
when the air filter sen-  
sor is restricted.  
Fault in the pre-  
heating  
T3008841  
T3008843  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
168 Heating and Air Conditioning  
General  
Three levels of the cab climate systems are  
available. They can be identified by the ap-  
pearance of the control panel.  
The basic system is a heater and defroster  
unit only. The heater unit has a rating of at  
least 40 000 Btu.  
W8001116  
The manually operated heating and air con-  
ditioning unit is controlled from the same  
panel as the heater system, with the  
addition of a switch for turning the air con-  
ditioning system on (button with the  
snowflake symbol).  
W8001003  
A variant of the air conditioning system  
can be added as an option. This is called  
the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)  
variant. It is identified with the switch  
marked aut. It allows all functions of the  
previous systems, plus the ability to main-  
tain the temperature in the cab as set by the  
driver. The desired temperature is selected  
by the combination of the temperature con-  
trol setting and the fan speed.  
W8001004  
The air conditioning only operates when  
the engine is running. Best performance  
from the air conditioning is achieved when  
all windows and vents are closed. At all  
times, make sure the cowl fresh air intake  
is free from snow, ice, leaves, etc.  
Do not attempt to drive with the wind-  
shield covered by mist, fog or frost. The  
visibility is reduced which could lead to  
an accident causing severe personal in-  
jury or death. Read these instructions to  
be able to hold the windshield clear at  
all times. Maximum heat output for fast  
defrosting can only happen after the en-  
gine has reached operating temperature.  
NOTE! The air conditioning system is con-  
tinuously monitored for correct function.  
The monitor module has a read-out for fault  
codes. See page 179 for more information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Heating and Air Conditioning 169  
Climate Unit Main Control Panel  
Fan Speed Control  
The fan has four speeds and can also be  
shut off. With the fan control in the 0 posi-  
tion, air still flows out of the dash vents if  
the vehicle is moving at highway speeds  
and if the Fresh Air Control is set for out-  
side air intake. If the Fresh Air Control is  
set for full recirculation, the fan has to be  
on for air to flow out the dash vents.  
W8001466  
If equipped with air conditioning, the fan is  
not controlled by the system to change fan  
speed with changing temperatures. Adjust  
the fan speed to the desired air flow.  
Fan speed must be selected to meet either  
heating or cooling needs. For the heater  
only and manual air conditioning variants  
of the climate system, settings of tempera-  
ture and air flow must be adjusted as often  
as necessary to accommodate changing  
temperatures outside and inside the cab.  
The ATC system is designed to maintain a  
constant temperature in the cab, which is  
set by the temperature control. As the sys-  
tem does not make automatic changes of  
fan speed, a selection of higher or lower  
fan speed to allow for more or less air flow  
may have to be made to achieve the correct  
temperature.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
170 Heating and Air Conditioning  
Air Distribution Control  
The air distribution control is used to direct  
the air flow to either the dash vents, floor  
vents or defroster vents. The lever has de-  
tentes in the outer and middle positions so  
that it can be set without looking at the  
panel.  
W8001467  
The air flow for the three major settings are  
described below. Any setting outside of the  
detented positions will be a mix of the air  
flows that depends on how far from the de-  
tented position the lever is.  
With the control in the leftmost  
position, all air is directed out  
through the vents in the dash.  
With the control in the middle  
position, most air is directed out  
through the floor vents and the  
cab door window vents. A small  
flow is directed out through the  
vents in the dash. This mix is  
approximately 80/20.  
With the control in the right-  
most position, most air is  
directed out through the front  
dash vents to the windshield and  
cab door windows. A small flow  
is directed out through the vents  
in the dash. This mix is approx-  
imately 70/30.  
NOTE! When the air vents on the dash are  
open, some air always flow through them.  
To have maximum air flow to the floor or  
to the windshield and cab door windows,  
close the dash vents.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Heating and Air Conditioning 171  
W8001078  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
172 Heating and Air Conditioning  
Fresh Air Control  
The top slide lever is the Fresh  
Air/Recirculation Control. The settings can  
be anywhere from full fresh air intake to  
only recirculated air. Settings can be chosen  
anywhere in between to give the desired  
flow of air.  
W8001468  
In the leftmost position, the  
fresh air inlet is closed. All air  
is recirculated within the cab. It  
can be used to heat up or cool  
down cab temperature quickly  
or to close intake from letting in  
odors, etc. with the intake air.  
In the middle position, there will  
be a 20% addition of fresh air  
to the 80% of recirculated air.  
This position is well suited for  
use when the air conditioning is  
engaged so a minimum of warm  
or cooled air is lost through the  
evacuation vents, while fresh air  
is still added to the cab.  
In the rightmost position, the  
fresh air inlet is completely  
open. This is best used when  
heat is required (wintertime)  
and when defrosting or de-icing.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Heating and Air Conditioning 173  
Temperature Control  
The bottom slide lever is the Temperature  
Control which operates the coolant control  
valve. In the leftmost position the flow of  
coolant is shut off by the control valve,  
which means no heat from the climate unit.  
The heat will increase the further to the  
right the control is moved.  
W8001469  
The temperature control should be used as  
a thermostat, together with the fan speed, to  
“dial” in the desired temperature when  
using the air conditioning. The desired tem-  
perature is selected by the combination of  
the temperature control setting and the fan  
speed. For the ATC version, the tempera-  
ture is automatically maintained to where  
the control was set. If needed, the control  
can be moved to a new setting without  
turning the ATC off.  
Using the heater on days when the outside  
temperature is low but there is direct sun-  
light heating through the windows, the air  
distribution control should be set in the  
center position (air directed to the floor)  
and the air vents open, and at the same  
time, the temperature control should be set  
around the middle position. Warm air is  
then distributed so that it is warmest at the  
floor and cooler air is distributed via the air  
vents on the dash.  
When the temperature control is set in one  
of the end positions, the temperature at the  
floor vents and the air vents is the same.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
174 Heating and Air Conditioning  
A/C Control  
When the vehicle is equipped with air con-  
ditioning, the control panel has a button for  
engaging the air conditioning compressor.  
This button is marked with a snowflake  
symbol. When the A/C is engaged, the  
green LED light in the button is on.  
W8001470  
When the air conditioning button is  
pressed, the fan speed control must be set  
on 1 through 4 for the air conditioning to  
start. If the air conditioning button is  
pressed when the fan speed control is set  
on 0, the air conditioning will not start.  
To set the air conditioning temperature, ad-  
just the temperature control and fan speed  
until the desired temperature/air flow has  
been reached. If the cab temperature needs  
adjusting, the temperature or fan speed has  
to be adjusted again until the new desired  
temperature has been reached.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Heating and Air Conditioning 175  
A/C Automatic Control  
When the vehicle is equipped with Auto-  
matic Temperature Control (ATC), the  
control panel has a button, marked with  
aut, for engaging the electronic control  
unit. When ATC is engaged, the green LED  
light in the button is on.  
W8001471  
The ATC air conditioning works with the  
coolant control valve as a “thermostat,”  
making automatic adjustments with input  
from sensors for air output and for air in-  
side of the cab. However, the fan speed  
may also have to be adjusted, increasing or  
decreasing air flow, to achieve correct cab  
temperature.  
To use the ATC, let the system run in the  
manual mode until the cab temperature has  
stabilized at a desirable temperature. Then  
press the aut button to engage the auto-  
matic control unit. To set a new desired  
temperature, simply slide the temperature  
control to a higher or lower setting and the  
system will maintain this new temperature  
within the ability of the temperature control.  
NOTE! Changing from manual to ATC  
control or the other way, makes the air out-  
put temperature change 5 to 10 degrees. A  
small correction to the temperature control  
is needed after the change has been made.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
176 Heating and Air Conditioning  
Air Vents  
A
B
C
D
Closed  
Open  
Lateral Air Flow  
Vertical Air Flow  
When heating the cab, all vents should be  
closed. However, the vents on the outer  
parts of the dash can be used for defrosting  
the cab door windows. When operating the  
air conditioning, all air vents should be  
completely open and the air flow directed  
upward.  
W8001150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Heating and Air Conditioning 177  
Cab Ventilation  
Ventilation Guidelines  
If at any time there is any doubt that ex-  
haust fumes are entering the cab, have the  
cause of the fumes determined and cor-  
rected as soon as possible. If the vehicle  
must be driven under these conditions,  
drive only with all windows open.  
To allow for proper operation of the vehicle  
ventilation system, keep the inlet grille at  
the base of the windshield clear of snow,  
ice, leaves and other obstructions at all  
times.  
Do not park the vehicle and let the engine  
run or idle for more than 10 minutes with  
the ventilation system control switch in the  
off position. Even with the ventilation sys-  
tem on, running the engine while parked or  
stopped for long periods of time is not rec-  
ommended. Entry of carbon monoxide into  
the cab is possible with a poorly repaired,  
damaged or corroded exhaust system or cab.  
Protect against carbon monoxide entry into  
the cab. Keep the engine exhaust system,  
cab and cab ventilation system properly  
maintained. It is recommended that the ex-  
haust system and cab are inspected by a  
competent technician:  
At every engine oil change.  
Whenever a change is noticed in the  
sound of the exhaust system.  
Do not run the engine in confined areas,  
such as garages or next to a building, any  
more than necessary. The area must be  
properly ventilated. When the vehicle must  
be stopped with the engine running for  
more than a few minutes:  
Whenever the exhaust system, under-  
body or cab is damaged.  
Adjust the heating or cooling system  
to force outside air into the cab. Do  
this by setting the fan to medium or  
high speed and with the controls set in  
any position except for recirculation of  
air inside of the cab.  
Do not breathe the engine exhaust gas. It  
contains carbon monoxide, which has no  
color or odor. Carbon monoxide is a  
dangerous gas which can cause uncon-  
sciousness or death.  
Keep the exhaust pipe area clear to  
help reduce the buildup of exhaust gas  
under the vehicle.  
Diesel engine exhaust and some of its  
constituents are known to the state of  
California to cause cancer, birth defects  
or other reproductive harm.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
178 Heating and Air Conditioning  
Cab Air Filter  
Air going into the cab passes a filter lo-  
cated on the right, front side of the cab.  
Remove the filter and clean with an air gun  
(no more than 20 psi pressure) after 40 000  
miles (64 000 km), (in dusty conditions as  
often as every 10 000 miles [16 000 km]).  
Make sure the air stream is directed from  
the inside out.  
The filter should not be cleaned and reused  
more than once. Replace with a new filter  
after maximum 70 000 miles (110 000 km),  
or earlier if driving in dusty conditions. A  
clogged filter decreases the efficiency of the  
air conditioning system.  
W8002474  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Heating and Air Conditioning 179  
A/C Diagnostic Module  
Problem Codes  
The diagnostic module has two LED lights  
(one green and one red) which indicate if a  
system problem has been detected. If a  
problem is detected, a fault code or “blink”  
code is activated to identify the condition.  
The blink codes listed on the label are:  
Slow Green  
Fast Green  
1 Red Blink  
2 Red Blinks  
Normal  
Low system voltage  
Loss of refrigerant  
W3002004  
Overcharge, blockage or  
fan failure  
3 Red Blinks  
4 Red Blinks  
Open or shorted clutch  
or circuit  
Open pressure switch or  
circuit  
The air conditioning system is under  
pressure. The possibility of an explosion  
is possible if serviced incorrectly. A  
qualified technician should perform any  
service needed. Failure to follow this  
may lead to an explosion causing severe  
injury or death.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
180 Seats  
General  
Several different seats can be used in the  
vehicles. If the seat installed in the vehicle  
is not explained in this section, look for the  
seat manufacturer’s manual in the Owner’s  
Package.  
On the driver’s side there is a standard seat  
and an upgrade that includes adjustable air  
cushions for lumbar and thigh-back sup-  
port, arm rests and a frame cover.  
The passenger side can have the same type  
of seat as on the driver’s side and also a  
fixed seat. Each of the seats are described  
on the pages that follow.  
W8002743  
National Standard Seat  
All adjustments are to be made while  
the operator is seated and the vehicle is  
stationary. Do not adjust the seat posi-  
tion while driving the vehicle. Failure to  
follow this warning can result in loss of  
vehicle control, which can result in seri-  
ous personal injury or death in the event  
of a crash.  
Before adjusting or fastening the seat belt,  
move the seat forward or rearward and ad-  
just the seat height as necessary. Sit erect  
and adjust the seat cushion and seat back to  
obtain a comfortable driving position.  
W8002809  
Volvo Standard Seat  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seats 181  
National Standard Seat Adjustments  
1
Backrest tilt: By rotating the round  
handle, the backrest recline angle can  
be adjusted within 12 degrees.  
2
Cushion front tilt and length: Pulling  
the handle up and out adjusts the tilt  
and length of the seat cushion.  
NOTE! Support body weight with  
your feet while adjusting.  
3
4
Fore and aft movement: Press the lever  
sideways to unlock the seat. Move seat  
fore or aft to a new position.  
Ride height adjustment: Push the up-  
per part of the switch up to increase  
ride height. Push the lower part of the  
switch to deflate the airbag and lower  
the ride height.  
W8002745  
5
Lumbar support adjustment: Push the  
upper part of the switch to inflate the  
support for a firmer support. Push the  
lower part of the switch to deflate the  
support.  
6
7
Cushion rear tilt: Rotate the lever to  
get different height positions.  
NOTE! Support body weight with  
your feet while adjusting.  
Chugger snubber: Moving the handle  
down isolates the seat from the fore  
and aft movement of the cab.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
182 Seats  
Volvo Standard Seat Adjustments  
1
Fore and aft movement: Press the con-  
trol down to unlock the seat cushion.  
Move seat cushion fore or aft to a new  
position.  
2
Cushion front tilt: Push the control  
down and adjust the tilt of the seat  
cushion.  
3
4
5
6
Ride height adjustment: Push or pull  
the control to change ride height.  
Lift the lever up to adjust the top part  
of the seat back.  
Push the lever down to adjust the  
whole backrest.  
The lumbar support is adjusted by  
turning the knob clockwise for firming  
and counterclockwise for slackening  
the support.  
W8002387  
7
The angle of the armrest is adjusted  
with the dial control on the underside  
of the armrest.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Seats 183  
National Stationary Seat  
For the passenger side, there is the option  
of a stationary seat. The base of the seat is  
a storage box that is accessed by lifting the  
seat cushion up. A bench seat for two pas-  
sengers is also available.  
W8001386  
No Passenger Seat (option)  
Using a temporary passenger seating  
without the benefit of proper seat  
mounting and safety belt can, in the  
event of a loss of control of the vehicle,  
cause serious personal injury or death.  
In vehicles with no passenger seat installed.  
Do not let a passenger ride on temporary  
seating. This is against the law and can be  
very dangerous.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
184 Cab Interior  
Interior/Reading Lights  
Front Of Cab  
The cab is equipped with separate and com-  
bined interior and reading lights in various  
locations in the cab. The front seat overhead  
lights can be turned on at any time using  
the switch in the fixture. By turning the  
switch the other way, the light will be acti-  
vated by the cab door switches. Any time  
the door is opened, the light will come on.  
W3004387  
There is also a light on the inner front face  
of the door that can be activated by the  
switch or be set to come on when the door  
opens. The lens is red so the light is used to  
alert oncoming traffic from the rear that the  
door is open. It is also used during night  
driving to light up the floor area without  
distracting the operator with a glaring light.  
W3000974  
The door switch operates all door-activated  
lights. The switch is located in the rear part  
of the door frame.  
The switch has a shut off function that can  
be used if the door needs to be open and  
the lights should not be on. To deactivate  
the lights, grasp the stem of the switch with  
two fingers, push it in and twist clockwise.  
The stem stays in and the light is off.  
W3000970  
When the switch stem is pushed in and re-  
leased, either by hand or by the door, it  
will return to the normal working position.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cab Interior 185  
CAUTION  
Storage Compartment  
Do not overload the cab suspension.  
Make sure the weight distribution is  
equal in the cab. Total load for the cab  
suspension is 800 lb (360 kg), with  
driver and passenger included. Overload-  
ing the suspension leads to poor ride and  
a lowered driving comfort.  
Heavy objects must be stored secured to  
the floor. Storage compartments are de-  
signed for lighter personal effects only.  
In the event of a collision, heavy, unse-  
cured objects in overhead storage can  
come loose and cause severe personal in-  
jury or death to the driver or passengers.  
WARNING  
All items within the cab must be secured  
before the vehicle is set in motion. This  
includes, but is not limited to, drinks,  
clothes, books, tools, etc. In the event of  
a collision, loose items could fly around  
inside the cab. This could cause personal  
injury.  
Front Overhead Storage  
There are several combinations of the over-  
head storage compartments mounted over  
the windshield. The compartments are split  
in the middle and they can be combined to  
cover the whole width of the cab or just  
over the driver.  
The storage compartments have a maxi-  
mum storage weight limit of approximately  
18 lb (8 kg) per section. That is, the limit  
covers each compartment section, either left  
or right side.  
W8001098  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
186 Cab Interior  
Cup Holders  
There is also a cup holder in the middle of  
the dash. To open, press the top part of the  
lid in and the lid will fold out. To close,  
press the lid in until the latch closes.  
There are also two cupholders molded into  
the engine cover.  
W8001875  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communication and Entertainment 187  
Antennas  
Multiband Antenna  
There are antennas mounted on the top of  
the mirror brackets for wideband reception.  
They receive or send signals for radio, CB  
and telephone. Each antenna carries multi-  
ple wire windings that work together with  
mirror bracket devices to cover the needs of  
many uses.  
If the antenna is damaged, replace it only  
with a multiband type antenna. A regular  
antenna does not have the wiring necessary  
to give good reception for all uses.  
W3004388  
Antenna Multiplexer  
W3004430  
1
2
3
Cellular Phone Antenna Cable  
Radio Antenna Cable  
Left Side Antenna  
4
5
CB Radio Antenna Cable  
Right Side Antenna  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
188 Communication and Entertainment  
Communications signals that travel to and  
from the antennas go through the antenna  
multiplexer. Coaxial cables for the cellular  
phone, CB radio and radio are included in  
the multiplexer system – all using the same  
set of antennas.  
The multiplexer is accessed through the  
lower dash panels. Cable routing is as  
shown in the illustration above. Use only  
genuine Volvo replacement parts for this  
multiplexer system; standard antennas will  
give unsatisfactory performance. The wind-  
ings in the antennas are specific to this  
system: different sections of the antenna are  
used for the cellular phone, radio and CB.  
Stereo/Radio  
Stereo  
The radio is mounted in the right hand side  
of the dash. Several models are available,  
from a basic unit to top of the line.  
Depending on the model, there are some  
important features built into the unit. Take  
the time to read the manufacturer’s manual  
to be able to operate the various functions,  
such as theft-deterrent coding.  
W3002006  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Communication and Entertainment 189  
Communication Equipment  
CB Radio  
There is an optional platform provided for  
a CB radio on top of the dash. The unit is  
held in place with a strap which can ac-  
commodate a variety of sizes. For electrical  
hook-up, see page 255.  
The CB Radio can also be permanently  
mounted directly above the radio. When the  
optional switch panel is removed, a DIN  
standard radio mount is available.  
W8001876  
Telephone  
There is room on the dash for a mobile  
telephone. This can be hooked up to the  
multiplex box.  
If the vehicle is delivered with a multiplex  
box, the connecting end of the telephone  
coaxial cable should be located at the lower  
dash cover.  
W3002427  
Road Relay  
The Road Relay is an engine communica-  
tion tool that allows the driver to have fuel  
consumption, time and mileage readouts  
and also programmed reminders for service  
intervals. The Road Relay should be per-  
manently mounted directly above the radio.  
Collected data can be downloaded for use  
in a stationary computer where the data can  
be collected and compared over time.  
W3002420  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
190 Fuel Economy Driving  
Fuel Economy  
General  
The absolute fuel consumption (counted in  
miles per US gallon or liters per 100 kilo-  
meters) is determined by a large number of  
circumstances which can be related to one  
of the following main areas:  
1
2
3
4
Build specification and equipment  
Service and maintenance  
External environment  
Driving habits  
Due to these factors, fuel consumption can  
vary considerably within what is called  
“normal fuel consumption.” Fuel consump-  
tion can vary from over 10 mpg (20 L/100  
km) when driving empty on a nice and dry  
summer road to 3.5 mpg (70 L/100 km)  
while driving with maximum permitted  
GVW, with vehicle and trailer, on a hilly  
and slushy winter road.  
Build Specification and Equipment  
Whenever a vehicle is used for transporta-  
tion, its build specification, equipment and  
gross vehicle weight have a decisive effect  
on both fuel consumption and performance.  
The factors which have the greatest influ-  
ence on fuel consumption are primarily:  
driveline combination, height of trailer or  
superstructure, use of air fairings, tire type,  
number of wheels, gross vehicle weight,  
and accessories.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fuel Economy Driving 191  
Driveline Combination  
Engine, transmission and final drive must  
be selected in such a way that the engine  
can operate within the economic speed  
range at normal driving speed. This range is  
defined as where the engine makes the best  
use of the energy content of the diesel fuel.  
A poorly selected rear axle ratio, which re-  
sults in the engine speed being constantly  
above the optimum speed, will increase  
fuel consumption.  
Superstructure and Air Fairings  
The frontal area of the vehicle and  
trailer/superstructure is what pushes the air  
aside. The smoother the transition between  
the aerodynamic front and cab to the  
trailer/superstructure, the better the airflow.  
With better airflow, the engine has to pro-  
duce less power to push the air to the side,  
especially at higher speeds.  
There are partial and full air fairing pack-  
ages available that should cover most  
vehicle specifications and applications.  
With flatbed trailers using tarpaulins to  
cover the load, make sure the cover is tied  
down well and presents a smooth surface.  
Tires  
Heavy duty treaded tires increase rolling  
resistance considerably. For long haul,  
choose a smoother, ribbed type tire. Choose  
a lugged type tire only when the added  
traction in mud and snow is needed.  
The number of wheels (axles) has a direct  
effect on the rolling resistance and, thereby,  
the fuel consumption. For volume and/or  
low weight transports, the use of a 4X2 in-  
stead of a 6X4 should be considered.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
192 Fuel Economy Driving  
Gross Vehicle Weight  
The gross vehicle weight of a vehicle com-  
bination has a large impact on the rolling  
resistance.  
Accessories  
As a rule, accessories such as roof rack, ad-  
vertising signs, bug screens, exposed air  
horns, etc., have a negative effect on fuel  
consumption.  
Service and Maintenance  
A modern heavy-duty vehicle requires reg-  
ular and preventive maintenance to ensure  
that all its components function as they  
should. Use the recommended preventive  
maintenance (PM) program that Volvo  
Trucks North America, Inc. has developed  
for the vehicles. This ensures optimal en-  
ergy efficiency from all components that  
are important to fuel consumption.  
Tires  
If the tire pressure is too low, the rolling  
resistance increases and, thereby, increases  
the fuel consumption. The overall economy  
is also affected as tire wear increases  
considerably.  
Brakes  
Dragging brakes increase fuel consumption.  
They should be checked regularly. It is im-  
portant that the release action of the air  
valves is fast and that the moving parts of  
the wheel brakes are checked for good ad-  
justment and operation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fuel Economy Driving 193  
Axles  
An axle out of alignment will increase  
rolling resistance. Regularly check the front  
wheel alignment and axles on both the trac-  
tor and trailer/semi-trailer. If they are  
correct, there will be less rolling resistance  
and, therefore, lower fuel consumption.  
A good sign of an axle or wheel out of  
alignment is uneven tire wear. Check the  
tires often.  
Engine  
Faulty or incorrectly adjusted engine com-  
ponents increase fuel consumption. The list  
below gives some typical components that  
can influence fuel consumption:  
Blocked (on the outside) charge air  
cooler/radiator package  
Faulty thermostats  
Blocked fuel filter  
Blocked air intake filter  
Faulty injectors  
Dirty turbo charger  
Air in fuel system  
Faulty fuel supply pump  
Faulty fuel relief valve  
Faulty fan thermostat/clutch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
194 Fuel Economy Driving  
External Environment  
Under unfavorable conditions, the external  
environment can have a negative effect on  
fuel consumption. This can be broken down  
into two main groups: weather and wind;  
and the nature of the roads. Rain, snow, icy  
conditions and headwinds have a large neg-  
ative impact on fuel economy, as do hilly  
roads and uneven road surfaces.  
Headwinds  
Headwinds have a large negative impact on  
fuel consumption. With tailwinds, fuel sav-  
ing is only marginal.  
Air Temperature  
Low ambient temperature contributes to in-  
creased fuel consumption.  
Rain, Snow and Road Surface  
A wet road surface increases rolling resis-  
tance and, thereby, fuel consumption. Slush  
will increase consumption even more. In  
certain cases, the surface structure of the  
road can also have a negative effect on fuel  
consumption.  
Gradients  
A hilly road with many bends demands a  
higher output from the engine. The differ-  
ence between flat, straight roads and hilly,  
winding roads can amount to as much as a  
50 percent increase in fuel consumption.  
When choosing your route, avoid hills,  
rough roads and frequent stops. Every stop  
from 45 mph (70 km/h) can cost up to an  
extra one quart (one liter) of fuel.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fuel Economy Driving 195  
Driving Habits  
The way in which a vehicle is being driven  
is the one factor which has the greatest in-  
fluence on fuel consumption. Correct  
driving saves fuel and reduces vehicle wear.  
To achieve optimal running economy, the  
driver should always remember to:  
Start the engine correctly (especially  
important in winter season)  
Maintain an even and correct speed  
Keep the engine at its optimum speed  
range  
Use the correct uphill and downhill  
driving technique.  
Starting the Engine  
Start the engine according to the instruc-  
tions in the Operator’s Manual of the  
engine manufacturer (for a Volvo engine,  
see page 198). A proper start, especially  
during the cold season, saves fuel and re-  
duces engine wear.  
Sluggish lube oil in the engine makes cold  
starting more difficult. Therefore, it is im-  
portant to always use engine oil with the  
correct viscosity. (For the sake of the over-  
all fuel economy, it is also important to  
have the right viscosity of transmission and  
rear axle oils.)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
196 Fuel Economy Driving  
Avoid High Engine Speeds  
High engine speeds mean high fuel con-  
sumption. Jerky driving also increases fuel  
consumption when the vehicle is constantly  
accelerated and slowed down. Avoid a  
higher consumption by steady, even driving.  
Refer to each engine manufacturer’s opera-  
tor’s manual for information on the  
engine’s optimum operating range.  
Hill Driving Technique  
Use the inertia of the vehicle to go over the  
crest of a hill under reduced power. Use  
gravity to help with acceleration when go-  
ing down the hill. Build up speed before  
reaching the next uphill.  
High Speed  
With increasing speed comes an increasing  
wind resistance that negatively affects fuel  
consumption.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Engine Start and Operation 197  
Starting the Engine  
Start Procedure  
NOTE! For cold weather starting, see page  
202.  
These starting and operating procedures  
should be followed for all engines. For  
more detailed information about design and  
function on a non-Volvo engine, read the  
Operator’s Manual from the engine manu-  
facturer.  
NOTE! Before starting the engine, see  
“Instruments and Controls” (starting on  
page 64) for detailed information on how  
the gauges and telltales work.  
Do not use ether or similar starting aids  
in a Volvo or any other engine with start  
help. The Volvo engine is equipped with  
a preheater. Introduction of ether or  
other combustible material in the intake  
manifold could cause a fire or explosion,  
resulting in severe property damage, se-  
vere personal injury or death.  
W0001484  
Never operate the starter without first  
placing the transmission in neutral or  
depressing the clutch pedal. Failure to  
follow these instructions may result in  
the unintentional movement of the vehi-  
cle resulting in property damage,  
personal injury or death.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
198 Engine Start and Operation  
1
Before starting the engine, perform the  
engine pre-trip inspection and daily  
maintenance checks in “Pre-Trip In-  
spection and Daily Maintenance”  
starting on page 28.  
2
3
4
Make sure the parking brakes are en-  
gaged.  
Place the transmission in neutral or  
depress the clutch pedal.  
CAUTION  
Do not crank the engine for more  
than 30 seconds at a time; wait two  
minutes after each try to allow the  
starter to cool. Failure to follow  
these instructions could cause  
starter damage.  
NOTE! Some starters are equipped  
with an optional thermostat. If over-  
cranking occurs, the thermostat breaks  
the electrical circuit to the starter mo-  
tor until the motor has cooled.  
Turn on the ignition with the switch  
key (see page 201 for ignition switch  
information). Some telltales will light  
up in a routine check that shows that  
bulbs and systems are OK. The  
INFO and  
STOP telltales will  
stay on between 3 to 10 seconds.  
If any of the telltales stay lit, that  
function of the vehicle may not be op-  
erable. Do not operate the vehicle until  
the problem is repaired.  
W3000753  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Engine Start and Operation 199  
5
6
Turn the key on to the start position.  
Release key as soon as the engine has  
started. For the Volvo engine, the pre-  
heater can be engaged to help starting  
in cold temperatures. For switch func-  
tion, see page 201.  
CAUTION  
If at start-up, or thereafter, the oil  
pressure gauge indicates any drop  
in oil pressure, the engine must be  
shut down immediately. Failure to  
stop the engine may cause major  
engine damage.  
W3000902  
When the engine has started, it takes a  
while to send lubricating oil to all  
bearings and shafts, and between pis-  
tons and liners. Wait for the oil  
pressure gauge to settle at a normal  
level, then bring engine speed up grad-  
ually. Increase speed as it warms up.  
Check all gauges during warm-up.  
7
During warm-up, apply load gradually  
until the oil temperature reaches 140 F  
(60 C). To start a loaded vehicle, the  
minimum coolant temperature must be  
approximately 120 F (50 C).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
200 Engine Start and Operation  
Stopping the Engine  
Allow the engine to slow down and idle for  
3 to 5 minutes before shutting it off. This  
allows the turbo to slow down and the  
cooling system to dissipate the engine heat.  
Switch the engine off by turning the igni-  
tion key to the O, or OFF, position.  
CAUTION  
Shutting off an engine immediately after  
high speed or full load operation can  
damage the turbo and cause heat stress  
in the engine. Always let the engine idle  
for 3 to 5 minutes before shutting it off.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Engine Start and Operation 201  
Ignition Switch  
The ignition switch is located on the right  
side of the steering column just under the  
steering wheel. Standard equipment is a  
normal ignition switch.  
A steering wheel lock is available as an op-  
tion. When the key is removed it actuates a  
detente pin that prevents the steering shaft  
from turning.  
NOTE! The vehicle is delivered with 2  
identical keys. If more keys are needed,  
order them through your Volvo Truck au-  
thorized dealer. The keys are laser cut  
and require a special machine for copy-  
ing, available through your Volvo Truck  
dealer. Record the key code and keep in  
a secure place. A new key can be made,  
using the key code, if the keys are lost.  
W3000976  
The ignition positions are:  
Off  
O
I
Radio, Accessories  
Drive  
II  
II 1/2 Preheat (Volvo engine only)  
Start  
III  
The ignition switch has a restart inhibitor  
locking out the start position after one try,  
which means that the key must be turned  
back to O before a new attempt at starting  
can be made.  
The key can only be removed when in the  
O or Off position.  
W3001302  
For full starting instructions, see page 198.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
202 Engine Start and Operation  
Cold Weather Start and Operation  
Volvo Engine Cold Start  
NOTE! These cold start instructions are for  
Volvo engines only. For other engine  
makes, see the manufacturer’s handbook.  
Do not use ether or similar starting aids  
in a Volvo or any other engine with start  
help. The Volvo engine is equipped with  
a preheater. Introduction of ether or  
other combustible material in the intake  
manifold could cause a fire or explosion,  
resulting in severe property damage, se-  
vere personal injury or death.  
NOTE! Volvo engines have a unique cold  
start feature. Depending on the ambient  
temperature, the engine cranks two to four  
turns without injecting fuel. This provides  
cleaner combustion at start-up and pro-  
motes longer engine life.  
To avoid excessive exhaust smoke when  
starting a cold engine, the intake air should  
be warmed up by using the preheater.  
Turn the ignition key to the preheat posi-  
tion and hold momentarily to engage the  
preheater. It remains engaged and will light  
the preheater telltale between 0 and 50 sec-  
onds, depending on the engine coolant  
temperature.  
T3008841  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Engine Start and Operation 203  
Coolant  
Preheater  
Temperature  
Engagement  
Time (seconds)  
Above +120 F (50 C)  
Above +50 F (10 C)  
0
0
Between +4 F (-15 C) 25 ± 2 to 50 ± 2  
and +50 F (10 C)  
Below +4 F (-15 C)  
50  
When the engine has started, the preheater  
may be re-engaged to assist in faster engine  
warm-up. To re-engage, turn the key to the  
preheat position and the preheater will en-  
gage. The starter will not engage as the  
start position is locked out.  
Engines Without Preheater  
Engines not equipped may, depending on  
coolant temperature, take longer to start. If  
this should happen, do not release the igni-  
tion key until the engine has started (while  
still observing the 30 second maximum  
cranking time).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
204 Engine Start and Operation  
Ether Start  
Do not use ether or similar starting aids  
in a Volvo or any other engine with start  
help. The Volvo engine is equipped with  
a preheater. Introduction of ether or  
other combustible material in the intake  
manifold could cause a fire or explosion,  
resulting in severe property damage, se-  
vere personal injury or death.  
W0001484  
Do not breathe the ether fumes. Breath-  
ing ether fumes could result in personal  
injury or death.  
If using a cold start system, make sure  
to read and follow the manufacturer’s  
instructions regarding its use, handling  
and storage. Many starting fluids are  
sold in capsules or pressure cans and  
improper usage can be dangerous, result-  
ing in personal injury or death.  
Ether allows combustion with lower cylin-  
der temperatures. A hand-held spray can for  
injecting ether through the engine air intake  
system will usually provide quick starting  
to as low as -10 F (-23 C). Below this tem-  
perature, a permanently installed system for  
injecting a combustible vapor directly into  
the intake manifold is necessary.  
Only inject ether vapors when the engine is  
cranking. Use it sparingly! Excessive ether  
use can cause piston and ring damage.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Engine Start and Operation 205  
Cold Weather Operation  
If the engine is in good mechanical condi-  
tion and the necessary preparations are  
taken for cold weather operation, ordinary  
cold weather will not cause difficulty in  
starting or loss of efficiency.  
Cold weather operation does require  
changes in operating practices, maintenance  
procedures, lubrication and fuel. Additions  
to the vehicle, such as heated fuel filters,  
fuel tank heater, engine block heater, win-  
terfront, etc. can make winter operation  
easier. Contact your Volvo Truck dealer for  
the correct accessories and information  
about installation.  
If satisfactory engine temperature is not  
maintained, increased engine wear will  
result in higher maintenance cost. Acces-  
sories should be designed to be easily  
disconnected when switching to driving in  
warmer weather so they do not affect the  
operation of the engine.  
For cold weather operation follow these  
recommendations:  
When starting the engine in tempera-  
tures below 32 F (0 C), use engine  
lubricants of lower viscosity. See the  
Operator’s Manual, Maintenance and  
Engine” for more information.  
When the temperature is below freez-  
ing, make sure the concentration of  
antifreeze in the coolant is sufficient to  
prevent freezing. See “Operator’s  
Manual, Maintenance and Engine” for  
more information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
206 Engine Start and Operation  
During cold weather, give more atten-  
tion to the condition of the batteries.  
Test them frequently to ensure suffi-  
cient power for starting. A dead  
battery may freeze.  
Fuel cloud point is the temperature at  
which wax crystals become visible,  
which is generally above the pour  
point of the fuel. To keep the fuel fil-  
ter elements from plugging with wax  
crystals, the cloud point should be no  
higher than the lowest ambient temper-  
ature at which the engine must start.  
To prevent wear and possible damage to the  
engine when it is cold, gradually bring it up  
to operating temperature before operating at  
high engine speeds or full load. After start-  
ing and before moving the vehicle, run the  
engine at 800 to 1000 r/min for 3 to 5 min-  
utes. Operate at partial engine load until the  
coolant temperature reaches 165 F (75 C).  
Engine Block Heater (option)  
An electric engine block heater can be in-  
stalled for keeping the coolant hot when the  
vehicle is parked. The heater is mounted  
through the side of the engine block with  
the heater coils in the coolant jacket. The  
heater does not interfere with normal oper-  
ation and can be permanently installed.  
The heater runs on 120 V and has an easily  
accessible plug, located under the driver  
side door. The plug will hook up to a nor-  
mal extension cable.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Engine Start and Operation 207  
Oil Pan Heater (option)  
Oil pan heaters aid low temperature starting  
by improving oil flow to critical parts in  
the engine. This helps prevent engine wear.  
They are similar to block heaters and are  
wired into the same plug as the engine  
coolant heater.  
Fuel Heater Filter (option)  
If running in very cold weather, a heated  
fuel filter should be added. A number of  
different fuel heaters are available as op-  
tions. They are electrically heated and  
regulated by a thermostat. They are typi-  
cally built into the primary fuel filter  
housing.  
W2001067  
Fuel Tank Heater (option)  
An in-tank fuel heater is also available. In-  
tank heaters use hot engine coolant to  
warm the fuel. This prevents wax formation  
in the fuel during cold season operation.  
These heaters are thermostatically con-  
trolled and will automatically raise the fuel  
temperature to an optimum level.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
208 Engine Start and Operation  
Winterfront  
Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. does not  
recommend the use of winterfronts, shutters  
or any other shield in front of the grille or  
radiator package under normal circum-  
stances.  
CAUTION  
Failure to remove the winterfront when  
temperatures go above -15 F (-25 C)  
could cause severe damage to engine,  
charge-air-cooler and/or loss of fuel  
economy.  
Today’s electronically controlled engines  
are designed to operate in cold tempera-  
tures without a winterfront. These devices,  
if not used properly, can cause higher ex-  
haust temperatures, power loss, excessive  
fan usage, failure of the charge-air-cooler  
and a reduction in fuel economy.  
Winterfronts are properly used in the win-  
tertime during very cold weather with  
sustained temperatures below -15 F  
(-25 C). In these cases, coolant and inlet  
manifold temperatures must also be care-  
fully monitored and controlled.  
If a winterfront is used, it must conform to  
these specifications:  
The grille coverage should be such  
that airflow through to the charge-air-  
cooler is at a uniform rate over the  
entire area. This means that a single,  
small opening in the winterfront is not  
acceptable.  
Air passage must be distributed evenly  
across the grille and no more than  
85% can be covered.  
Please see your local Volvo Trucks dealer  
for Volvo recommended winterfronts.  
NOTE! If there is engine or related dam-  
age that can be traced to an improperly  
used winterfront, the warranty is no longer  
valid for those parts.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Engine Start and Operation 209  
Engine Operation  
General  
Proper operation, driving techniques and  
maintenance are key factors in obtaining  
the maximum life and economy from a  
modern turbocharged diesel engine. This  
section has operational information about  
the components that make up the engine.  
For the best operation economy, see “Fuel  
Economy” page 190.  
When changing gears, avoid lugging to  
extend engine life. When the engine is op-  
erating at full throttle and maximum  
governed speed cannot be reached or main-  
tained, the engine is lugging. When  
approaching a hill requiring more power, it  
is necessary to downshift the transmission  
as the vehicle goes into the grade. Acceler-  
ating to the governed engine speed will  
give additional power at approximately the  
same road speed. For shifting instructions,  
see the transmission manufacturer’s Opera-  
tor’s Manual.  
Always start moving the load in a gear low  
enough so that the engine can be acceler-  
ated to the governed speed. Then shift to  
the next gear as the engine decelerates. For  
loaded vehicles, do not skip a gear or lug  
the engine while getting up to cruising  
speed. For empty or light loads, it is per-  
missible to skip gears.  
When operating on a level highway or at  
cruising speed, hold the engine speed at ap-  
proximately 75 to 85 percent of governed  
speed (1400 to 1600 r/min for large dis-  
placement engines) to achieve power and  
economical fuel consumption.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
210 Engine Start and Operation  
The operator should understand the operat-  
ing characteristics of the engine the vehicle  
is equipped with. Modern diesel engines  
have maximum torques at much lower en-  
gine speeds than in the past. As such, these  
engines are designed to perform satisfacto-  
rily at a lower speed. New transmissions  
with wide ratio steps between gears de-  
mand the use of these engines.  
Excessive exhaust smoke may be due to the  
type of fuel used, a restricted air cleaner, a  
malfunctioning fuel system or the way the  
vehicle is operated. Shift gears and increase  
or decrease the engine speed as necessary  
to obtain the engine speed/transmission  
gear combination which will prevent smok-  
ing. Excessive smoke indicates wasted fuel  
which creates carbon deposits in the engine  
and turbocharger. This causes excessive en-  
gine wear and oil consumption. Excessive  
smoke not only polutes the atmosphere but  
can also cause shortened exhaust system  
life.  
Engine Break-In  
Engines used in the VHD-series are run on  
dynamometers before being shipped from  
the manufacturer. In most applications, the  
engine can be put to work immediately, but  
the operator should be extra observant of  
the operating conditions shown on the  
gauges during the initial 100 hours or 3000  
miles (5000 km).  
A more frequent check of the engine com-  
partment for fluid leaks, fluid levels and  
fastener tightness is also recommended dur-  
ing the initial period.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Engine Start and Operation 211  
Engine Shut-Down System  
Failure to take the necessary precautions  
when the INFO or STOP telltales  
are on, can ultimately result in automatic  
engine shut-down and the loss of power  
steering. Vehicle crash can occur.  
The engine shut-down system will automat-  
ically derate or stop the engine when one  
or more of the systems listed below reaches  
a critical stage:  
T3008861  
High Coolant Temperature  
Low Oil Pressure  
Low Coolant Level  
T3008860  
Derate and shut-down functions may be ap-  
plied differently, or added to, depending on  
the engine manufacturer. See the engine op-  
erator’s manual for more information.  
When the shut-down is activated, the  
telltales come on and the buzzer is also ac-  
tivated. From that time it will take 30  
seconds before the engine shuts down. In  
this time period, find a safe place to pull  
off of the road.  
After the engine has been shut down by the  
system, the override will allow a restart of  
the engine for a period of 30 seconds. This  
is so that the vehicle may be pulled off of  
the road, if necessary. The alarm will re-  
main activated until repairs have been made  
to correct the problem.  
WARNING  
The operator should not continually  
override the system as this can cause se-  
rious damage to the vehicle’s engine.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
212 Engine Start and Operation  
Engine Overspeed  
This vehicle is equipped with a diesel en-  
gine and should not be operated in an area  
with a concentration of hydrocarbon vapors  
(for example gasoline or diesel fuel fumes).  
Be especially cautious of low-lying or  
closed-in areas. The vapors may be drawn  
into the engine through the air intake and  
cause the engine to overspeed. Hot carbon  
and other sparks may come from the ex-  
haust system, and cause an explosion and  
fire.  
If the vehicle is in an area where hydrocar-  
bon vapors may be present, shut the engine  
off immediately if any abnormalities are  
experienced. Do not leave it unattended.  
The diesel engine will operate on any  
fuel which enters the cylinder, whether it  
is from the injectors or from the air in-  
take system. Therefore, if any solvent is  
used to flush out the air cleaner element,  
the engine may overspeed during  
start-up. Engine damage and severe  
injury and/or death from burns or explo-  
sion can occur.  
Do not use ether or similar starting aids  
in a Volvo or any other engine with start  
help. The Volvo engine is equipped with  
a preheater. Introduction of ether or  
other combustible material in the intake  
manifold could cause a fire or explosion,  
resulting in severe property damage, se-  
vere personal injury or death.  
W0001484  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Engine Start and Operation 213  
Idling  
All engines in the VHD models are elec-  
tronically governed engines. The idle speed  
is pre-programmed from the manufacturer.  
Low idle speed is adjustable within certain  
limits (for most engines between 600 to 750  
r/min). See page 214 for more information.  
The common belief that idling a diesel en-  
gine causes no engine damage is wrong.  
Idling produces sulfuric acid, which breaks  
down the oil and eats into bearings, rings,  
valve stems and engine surfaces.  
NOTE! Avoid excessive idling. If the vehi-  
cle is parked for more than 5 minutes, stop  
the engine. An engine can burn from 0.75  
to 1.5 gallons (3 to 5.5 liters) of fuel per  
hour while idling. During long engine  
idling periods, the engine coolant tempera-  
ture may fall below the normal operating  
range*. Incomplete combustion of fuel dur-  
ing the warm-up period can cause dilution  
of the oil in the crankcase, formation of  
lacquer or gummy deposits on the valves,  
pistons and rings, and rapid accumulation  
of sludge in the engine.  
*Volvo engines are equipped with a  
warmholding device (EPG = Exhaust Pres-  
sure Governor) to keep engine to normal  
operating temperature to prevent incom-  
plete combustion, even at idle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
214 Engine Start and Operation  
Low Idle Adjustment  
If the engine coolant temperature is above  
122 F (50 C), the vehicle is stationary (en-  
gine running; accelerator released; parking  
brake on) and the PTO not engaged, the en-  
gine low idle speed can be adjusted with  
the use of the cruise control function.  
W3002499  
1
2
3
Set the cruise control switch to the  
ON position.  
Depress the foot brake pedal. Hold it  
down during the entire procedure.  
Move the cruise control switch to the  
RESUME position and hold it there  
for four seconds. Release the switch.  
The engine speed will drop to the de-  
fault low idle.  
Before setting the idle, apply the parking  
brakes and place the transmission in  
neutral. Failure to do so can result in un-  
expected vehicle movement and can  
cause serious personal injury or death.  
4
5
The idle speed is adjusted up with the  
SET+ switch. Each time the SET+  
switch is pressed momentarily, idle  
speed will increase approx. 10 r/min  
(the speed cannot be increased above  
the maximum allowed by the engine  
manufacturer).  
The idle speed is adjusted down with  
the SET- switch. Each time the SET-  
switch is pressed momentarily, the idle  
speed will decrease approx. 10 r/min.  
(the speed cannot be adjusted below  
the low idle set by the engine manu-  
facturer). By continuously pressing the  
switch, engine speed will ramp up  
(SET+) or down (SET-).  
6
7
When the desired engine idle speed is  
reached, push and hold the SET and  
move the cruise control switch to the  
RESUME position at the same time  
and hold them in position for four sec-  
onds. Release the switches.  
Release the brake pedal to set the new  
idle speed. If an error was made dur-  
ing the adjustment procedure, the  
default idle speed will be maintained.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Engine Start and Operation 215  
Idle Shutdown Timer  
The idle shutdown timer can be pro-  
grammed to shut the engine down after a  
specific engine idling time. The program  
can not be changed by the operator but  
requires a special tool (Pro-Link) that con-  
nects to the engine electronic control unit.  
This is available at your Volvo Truck dealer.  
The time can be set to these time intervals:  
Volvo  
1 to 40 minutes  
1 to 100 minutes  
2 to 100 minutes  
Cummins  
Detroit  
The engine will shut down at the set time  
under the following conditions:  
Vehicle speed is 0.  
Engine is running at idle speed.  
Coolant temperature is above  
113 F (45 C).  
Parking brake is applied.  
These are the standard choices when the  
vehicle is delivered. For other customer  
adaptation choices, contact your Volvo  
Truck dealer for more information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
216 Engine Start and Operation  
Uphill Operation  
For best performance, allow engine speed  
to reach the bottom of the rated torque  
range before downshifting. Continue to  
downshift in this manner until a gear is  
reached that will maintain the desired  
speed. Continue to operate at the rated  
torque if the vehicle will make it to the top  
without a downshift. Begin upshifting as  
the grade of the hill decreases and the en-  
gine begins to accelerate above 1600 r/min.  
Driving this way will give the best fuel  
economy and performance.  
NOTE! Allowing the engine to lug down  
to the end of maximum torque range is per-  
missible if the vehicle is cresting the top of  
a hill. However, extended operation at en-  
gine speeds below the maximum torque  
range (usually 1100 to 1200 r/min) will  
raise exhaust temperature and cylinder pres-  
sure. This can lead to reduced engine life.  
Downhill Operation  
CAUTION  
Do not exceed engine manufacturer’s  
recommended maximum engine speed.  
Engine damage can occur. If equipped  
with an engine or exhaust brake, do not  
exceed 2300 r/min.  
On a downgrade, do not coast with the  
clutch pedal depressed or the transmission  
in neutral. Select a gear that does not allow  
the engine speed to exceed the engine  
manufacturer’s maximum engine speed rec-  
ommendation. Use the engine or exhaust  
brake and/or the service brakes to control  
the vehicle speed. A simple rule is to select  
the same gear used to go up the grade.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Engine Start and Operation 217  
High Altitude Operation  
Engines lose power when operated at high  
altitude because the air is too thin to allow  
burning as much fuel as at sea level. For  
naturally aspirated engines, this loss is  
about 3 percent per 1000 feet (300 m) in-  
crease in altitude above sea level. Most  
turbocharged engines are rated for higher  
altitudes and will not lose as much power  
as a naturally aspirated engine.  
An engine will produce excessive exhaust  
smoke at high altitude unless a lower gear  
is used. Shift gears as needed to avoid ex-  
cessive exhaust smoke.  
Closely monitor the gauges during high al-  
titude operation. The thinner ambient air  
reduces the efficiency of the engine cooling  
system. Engine overheat or cylinder dam-  
age could occur if the engine is operated at  
full load for extended periods at high alti-  
tudes in hot weather. Downshift and reduce  
vehicle speed to reduce engine load when  
driving on long grades in these conditions.  
This will help keep engine air intake mani-  
fold and coolant temperatures within safe  
limits.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
218 Engine Start and Operation  
Cruise Control  
Do not use the cruise control in heavy  
traffic, with ice/snow on the road or dur-  
ing other unfavorable conditions. This  
may lead to a loss of vehicle control,  
causing a vehicle crash and can result in  
personal injury or death.  
Engaging  
The cruise control switches are located on  
the turn signal lever.  
To engage and set desired speed:  
W3002499  
1
2
Set the cruise control switch to ON.  
When the desired vehicle speed has  
been reached, momentarily press in  
the SET+ or SET- switch on the end  
of the lever.  
3
4
If the speed needs to be increased,  
press the SET+ switch. The vehicle  
speed will increase as long as the  
SET+ switch is pressed (speed will not  
increase above the maximum pro-  
grammed speed). Release when the  
desired speed has been reached.  
If the speed needs to be decreased,  
press the SET- switch. The vehicle  
speed will decrease as long as the  
SET- switch is pressed (speed will not  
decrease below the minimum pro-  
grammed speed). Release when the  
desired speed has been reached.  
NOTE! The cruise control cannot be en-  
gaged at speeds below approximately  
30 mph (45 km/h) and engine speed below  
approximately 1000 r/min.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Engine Start and Operation 219  
Disengaging  
The cruise control is disengaged if the  
brake or clutch pedal is depressed, or if the  
cruise control switch is set to OFF. If the  
ignition key is turned back to the acces-  
sories position (R), the cruise control  
system will automatically be disengaged.  
Resuming Vehicle Speed  
The previously selected cruise speed is re-  
tained in the memory. When the cruise  
control switch is pushed to the RESUME  
position, the vehicle resumes the previously  
set speed (provided vehicle speed exceeds  
approximately 10 mph (15 km/h) when the  
switch is pressed).  
Acceleration  
Momentary acceleration (such as for pass-  
ing another vehicle) does not interrupt  
cruise control operation. After passing, re-  
lease accelerator and let the vehicle slow to  
cruise control speed. The previously set  
speed will then be maintained without hav-  
ing to set the switch to RESUME.  
CAUTION  
On vehicles equipped with Eaton VO-  
RAD SmartCruise, cruise control is  
disengaged in the event the SmartCruise  
system fails to operate. You must stop  
the truck, turn the ignition off and on,  
and activate the control twice in order  
for the cruise control to operate.  
NOTE! Read the Eaton VORAD Collision  
Warning System Driver Reference Manual  
before taking the vehicle out on the road.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
220 Engine Start and Operation  
Fuel Tank(s)  
Tank Cap  
Do not remove the fuel tank cap near an  
open flame. Diesel fuel vapors are com-  
bustible and can cause an explosion or  
fire, resulting in severe personal injury  
or death.  
The fuel tank caps have a pressure and a  
thermal relief function built into the cap.  
These functions are designed to avoid fuel  
spills in the event of an accident. The pres-  
sure relief function of the safety venting  
system has a crack pressure high enough to  
retain fuel in the tank regardless of the ori-  
entation of the vehicle [5 to 8 psi (35 to 55  
kPa)].  
W2003143  
The thermal relief feature is large enough  
to limit tank pressure to a safe level even  
when the remaining fuel is boiling in the  
tank, but not so large as to dump fuel un-  
neccessarily. The thermal relief should  
respond as much as possible to fuel tem-  
perature rather than flame temperature.  
These features are also available on the op-  
tional lockable fuel tank cap.  
W2003144  
WARNING  
Only replace the cap with a cap contain-  
ing the same features described above.  
Unneccessary fuel spills leading to in-  
creased fire hazard may be the result of  
using a cap without the pressure and  
thermal relief mechanisms.  
In the case the cap is lost, it must be re-  
placed with a cap containing the same  
features.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Engine Start and Operation 221  
Fueling  
Air is always present inside the fuel tanks,  
entering mainly through the tank ventila-  
tion. With the air being heated up and  
cooled down, condensation is formed and  
water is mixed in the fuel. To avoid con-  
densation when the vehicle is parked for  
longer periods, fill the tanks up to 95% of  
capacity. Do not fill more than that, as the  
fuel needs to have room for expansion dur-  
ing the heat of the day.  
Do not carry extra fuel containers in the  
cab. Fuel containers, full or empty, may  
leak, explode or give added fuel to a fire.  
Failure to follow this precaution may  
lead to serious personal injury or death.  
Do not smoke while fueling the vehicle.  
The glow from the cigarette can ignite  
the diesel fuel, causing an explosion re-  
sulting in serious personal injury or  
death.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
222 Clutch and Transmission  
Clutch  
General  
Before starting the engine, set the park-  
ing brakes and place the transmission in  
neutral. Failure to do so can result in un-  
expected vehicle movement and can  
cause serious personal injury and death.  
Do not allow the clutch to slip excessively.  
This would cause excessive heat to be gen-  
erated and the clutch will be damaged and  
bring on premature failure. As soon as the  
vehicle is moving, remove the foot from  
the pedal for complete clutch engagement.  
Once the clutch is fully engaged, heat and  
wear does not affect it.  
W4000760  
Do not shock load the drive line through  
rapid engagement of the clutch. Extreme  
care should be taken when driving heavy  
loads up hills. Always use the lowest gear  
when starting out under adverse conditions.  
When operating a vehicle equipped with a  
clutch brake, the clutch pedal should not be  
depressed more than halfway to the floor  
while shifting, except when the vehicle is  
at a stop. To re-enter the low gear from  
neutral or reverse, or to enter reverse gear  
from neutral or low, the clutch should be  
depressed all the way to engage the clutch  
brake. This stops the rotation of the trans-  
mission input shaft and provides an easy,  
quiet gear engagement.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Brakes 223  
Brakes  
Brake Safety Information  
Do not inspect or adjust parts or compo-  
nents in the brake system without setting  
the parking brake, placing the transmis-  
sion in neutral and securely chocking the  
wheels. If the vehicle is not secured to  
prevent uncontrolled vehicle movement,  
it could roll and cause severe personal  
injury or death.  
Do not operate the vehicle when there is  
a malfunction in the compressed air sys-  
tem. An air brake system with leaks or  
other malfunctions may prevent the  
brake system from operating properly.  
The vehicle should not be operated until  
the system is repaired and all brake cir-  
cuits are working properly. Failure to  
repair the system can lead to loss of  
control of the vehicle resulting in severe  
personal injury or death.  
Do not use replacement parts anywhere  
in the brake system unless it conforms  
exactly to original specifications. A non-  
conforming part in your vehicle’s brake  
system could cause a malfunction, lead-  
ing to loss of control of the vehicle  
resulting in severe personal injury or  
death.  
The brake system is a critical vehicle  
safety system. For your safety and for  
those around you, follow the recom-  
mended preventive maintenance checks.  
If any problems occur, have them inves-  
tigated immediately by an authorized  
service facility. Failure to properly main-  
tain the brake system can result in  
compromised brake efficiency and may  
lead to loss of control of the vehicle re-  
sulting in severe personal injury or death.  
Do not ride the brakes going down steep  
hills. The brakes could overheat and lose  
their effectiveness. Always choose a low  
gear before going down the grade and  
reduce speed to help control vehicle  
speed. Losing the brakes going downhill  
can lead to an accident causing serious  
personal injury or death.  
Do not drive through deep water. The  
brake system can be affected so the  
braking efficiency is less or the brakes  
pull the vehicle to the side. This could  
lead to an accident leading to serious  
personal injury or death.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
224 Brakes  
Do not release the parking brake or at-  
tempt to move the vehicle until brake air  
pressure in both circuits is at least 100  
psi (690 kPa). Failure to follow this pro-  
cedure may lead to uncontrolled vehicle  
movement and cause severe personal in-  
jury or death.  
Never release or drive a truck that has a  
brake discrepancy — no matter how mi-  
nor — until it has been repaired or  
corrected. Failure to repair brake dis-  
crepancies can result in compromised  
brake efficiency and may lead to loss of  
control of the vehicle resulting in severe  
personal injury or death.  
General  
All Volvo vehicles are designed to meet or  
exceed all applicable federal brake stan-  
dards and regulations. They use a dual  
circuit, compressed air system. It consists  
of two independent brake systems that use  
a single set of brake controls. Each circuit  
is supplied by its own compressed air tank.  
Both air tanks receive compressed air from  
the same supply tank (wet tank) and are  
charged with equal pressure. The two cir-  
cuits are interconnected for the parking  
brake system.  
Air pressures in the two circuits are moni-  
tored by two pressure gauges on the right  
side of the instrument cluster. The primary  
(rear) brake circuit gauge is marked with an  
“R” within a symbol and the secondary  
(front) brake circuit gauge is marked with  
an “F” within a symbol. The two pointers  
should register equal or nearly equal pres-  
sure. By observing the gauge pointers, the  
operator is forewarned in the event of a  
pressure drop in either or both of the cir-  
cuits. See page 85 for more information.  
W3003637  
Before operating the vehicle, check the air  
gauges which indicate air pressure. They  
should not register less than 105 psi  
(725 kPa). Maximum pressure at any time  
should not exceed 150 psi (1035 kPa).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Brakes 225  
Both circuits are piped into a dual brake  
valve, which simultaneously applies front  
and rear axle service brakes during each  
brake application. In the event of a failure  
in either one of the circuits, the other cir-  
cuit becomes the emergency circuit for  
applying the brakes.  
W5000923  
The Master Warning Telltale and buzzer  
alerts of a dangerous situation. Air pres-  
sure is low and the remaining air volume  
may not be enough for repeated braking.  
Failure to heed this warning can result  
in loss of braking control resulting in a  
vehicle accident and injury or death.  
W3000638  
Master Warning Telltale  
An important feature of the brake system is  
that an automatic spring brake application  
does not take place as a result of an air loss  
in only one of the two circuits. In this case,  
brake control remains in the foot brake  
valve. In each air pressure gauge, there is a  
warning light connected to a low pressure  
switch that comes on if air pressure goes  
below 60 psi (420 kPa). At the same time,  
the buzzer will sound and the main warning  
telltale will come on. This pressure drop  
warns the operator to make a manual emer-  
gency stop before an automatic emergency  
stop takes place.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
226 Brakes  
Brake System Controls  
The air compressor, governor, pressure reg-  
ulator valve and reservoirs are control  
devices. Their function is to build up,  
maintain and control air pressure in the  
reservoirs. This is so that pressure is held  
constant between the minimum and maxi-  
mum range established for air brake  
operation.  
The brake valve, quick release valve, brake  
chambers and slack adjusters are applica-  
tion devices. They distribute the air  
pressure and convert its energy into the me-  
chanical force necessary to apply or release  
the brakes.  
Foot Brake Valve  
The foot brake valve is directly connected  
to the brake pedal. The valve gives a pro-  
gressive output against the pedal travel.  
This allows better control of the pressure in  
the first half of the pedal travel. In the last  
half of the pedal travel, the pressure output  
increase is faster.  
The foot brake valve applies the service  
brakes, incorporating both the primary and  
secondary air systems. The primary system  
controls the rear brakes and the secondary  
system controls the front brakes. The foot  
brake valve receives air from the com-  
pressed air tanks. Air pressure is then  
delivered to the wheel brake chambers as  
required by the amount of pressure exerted  
on the foot brake pedal. The brake chamber  
force then applies the wheel brakes.  
W5000920  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Brakes 227  
From the operator’s viewpoint, operating  
the foot brake valve of a vehicle equipped  
with air brakes differs very little from the  
operation of a conventionally braked vehi-  
cle. Because the operation of the brake  
pedal requires scarcely more effort than de-  
pressing the average throttle pedal, air  
brakes are naturally much easier to control.  
If the driver gives full attention to the fol-  
lowing suggestions, a little experience will  
make him/her thoroughly familiar with the  
air-controlled braking of this vehicle.  
Failure to observe these precautions can  
result in loss of vehicle control and seri-  
ous personal injury or death can occur.  
1
The best possible stop will be made  
when the first brake application is as  
firm as the speed and road condition  
permit. Then, ease off as the speed is  
reduced. Never apply the brakes  
lightly at first and increase the pres-  
sure as the speed diminishes.  
2
3
Do not fan the brake pedal. Fanning  
gives poor brake performance and  
wastes air.  
The air brake is designed so that when  
the brake pedal is fully depressed, an  
emergency application results. This  
application should be made only in an  
emergency situation.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
228 Brakes  
4
In making a stop or a slow-down, al-  
low the transmission to remain in gear  
with the throttle closed, disengaging  
the clutch only when engine idling  
speed is reached.  
5
6
7
When parking the vehicle, place the  
transmission in neutral and set the  
parking brake before shutting down  
the engine.  
When descending a long grade, do not  
use the service brakes too long or too  
often. The brakes may overheat and  
lose their effectiveness.  
Before descending a steep grade, the  
transmission should be shifted into a  
lower gear and the vehicle speed re-  
duced. Other speed retardation devices  
should also be used if available (en-  
gine brakes, retarders or trailer hand  
control valves).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Brakes 229  
Parking Brake/Trailer Supply Valves  
Trucks/Tractors may have two air control  
valves on the instrument panel:  
Trailer Supply (red octagonal knob)  
System Park (yellow diamond knob)  
The two air control valves are intercon-  
nected and interacting. The System Park  
valve supplies and controls the Trailer Air  
Supply valve.  
W5000924  
The System Park valve knob (yellow)  
should be pushed in first, after sufficient air  
pressure is built up (apply foot brake to pre-  
vent vehicle from rolling). The Trailer Air  
Supply valve knob may then be pushed in.  
The Trailer Air Supply valve knob and Sys-  
tem Park valve knob will automatically pop  
out if the system pressure (both front and  
rear circuits) drops to 25 to 35 psi (170 to  
240 kPa). The tractor protection valve will  
then close, the tractor spring brakes will  
apply and the trailer emergency system will  
be activated.  
W5001138  
On vehicles equipped with the standard two  
valve system, the operation of one valve to-  
gether with the other permits the operator  
to select the desired functions described be-  
low:  
Red Valve  
(Trailer Air Valve (Sys-  
Yellow  
Function  
(Mode)  
Supply)  
tem Park)  
Out  
Out  
System  
Park  
In  
In  
Out  
In  
Trailer  
Charge  
Normal  
Running  
Out  
In  
Bobtail  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
230 Brakes  
Parking Brake Release  
VHD models have engines equipped with  
engine electronic control units (EECU).  
These have two features that may impact  
the brake system. One is the anti-stall de-  
vice in the EECU which senses torque  
demand and automatically controls the en-  
gine to compensate and maintain speed. On  
tractors equipped with parking brakes on  
only one axle, the anti-stall device keeps  
the engine from stalling, allowing the driver  
to pull away with the brakes dragging. This  
may result in overheated brakes and dam-  
aged wheel hubs.  
W5001114  
WARNING  
Continual dragging of the brakes will  
cause brakes to overheat. This may lead  
to wheel end fire. To avoid overheating,  
make sure both parking brake knobs are  
pushed in before driving off.  
If both the yellow and the red knobs are  
pulled out, the combined force of the two  
trailer axles and the tractor drive axle is  
sufficient to stall the engine. However, if  
the yellow knob is pulled out and the red  
knob is pushed in, a condition is created  
where the trailer parking brakes are not ap-  
plied and only the single drive axle brakes  
are applied. In this condition, the vehicle  
can be driven away. Therefore, it is very  
important that the driver makes sure the  
yellow and the red knobs are pushed all the  
way in before driving the vehicle.  
W5001116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Brakes 231  
There is also an engine shut-down device  
in the EECU that shuts the engine down af-  
ter a pre-programmed time in order to save  
fuel. This is activated when the yellow  
parking brake knob is pulled out. There-  
fore, some drivers park and release the  
parking brakes using only the red knob to  
keep the engine running. It is then easily  
overlooked that in a vehicle parked with  
both the yellow and red knobs activated,  
only the red knob is pushed in by habit.  
W5001117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
232 Brakes  
Spring Brake For Parking  
Never leave the vehicle without being  
certain the parking brakes are set or that  
other precautions are taken to prevent the  
vehicle from rolling. Failure to do so can  
result in serious personal injury or death.  
The parking brake mechanism uses spring  
pressure as a separate power medium to ap-  
ply the service brakes on the driving axles.  
The parking brake is released by the same  
compressed air source used to apply the  
service brakes. Since this brake is released  
by air pressure, the system must be charged  
to at least 60 psi (420 kPa) before the park-  
ing brake may be released.  
W5000643  
The parking brake spring tension is suffi-  
cient to hold a fully loaded vehicle on  
maximum grades permitted on modern  
highways, provided the brake drums and  
linings are in good condition and the brakes  
are properly adjusted.  
CAUTION  
Do not use the spring parking brakes if  
the service brakes are hot, such as after  
descending a steep grade. Also, do not  
use the spring parking brakes during  
freezing temperatures if the wheel  
brakes are wet. To do so could damage  
the brakes, if hot, or may cause them to  
freeze during cold weather.  
If the brakes are wet, drive the vehicle in  
low gear and lightly apply the brakes to  
heat and dry them. Allow hot brakes to  
cool before using the parking spring brakes.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Brakes 233  
There are several ways to determine if the  
parking brakes have been set. By pulling  
out the yellow knob:  
An audible rush of air will be heard  
when the parking brake knob is pulled.  
The air exhausts from the park brake  
valve itself and from the spring brake  
chambers on the rear axle(s).  
A black ring around the base of the  
yellow control knob will be seen.  
The engine will stall if an attempt is  
made to set the vehicle in motion.  
There will be a fluctuation in the air  
pressure gauge needles.  
You will not be able to pull the knob  
out any further.  
Do not attempt in any way to disassem-  
ble or tamper with the spring brake  
chamber. The force stored in the spring,  
if suddenly released, can cause serious  
personal injury or death.  
Do not apply the parking brake while  
the vehicle is moving. The rear wheels  
may lock up causing loss of vehicle con-  
trol leading to an accident with severe  
personal injury or death.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
234 Brakes  
Trailer Brake Hand Control  
The trailer hand brake control is not a  
parking brake valve and must not be  
used as one. This brake is not designed  
to hold the vehicle stationary. Failure to  
follow these instructions can result in the  
unintentional movement of the vehicle  
and may cause personal injury or death.  
W5001035  
The hand control valve for the trailer  
brakes engages the trailer brakes indepen-  
dently from the vehicle brakes. The valve  
can be fully or partially engaged but in any  
partial position it will be overridden by a  
full application of the foot brake valve.  
To supply air to the trailer brakes to slow  
the trailer down, pull the valve handle  
down. The farther the handle is pulled  
down, the more air pressure is applied to  
the trailer brakes. Releasing the self-  
returning handle releases the trailer brakes.  
Air Tanks  
WARNING  
When draining the air tanks, do not look  
into the area of the draining air. Dirt or  
sludge particles may be in the air stream  
and could cause eye injury.  
Air tanks should be drained daily. Make  
sure the drain cocks close properly after  
draining. Empty moisture from air tanks by  
pulling the drain valve wire. The tanks  
should be checked for condensation fluid  
even if an automatic drain valve is installed.  
W5001203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Brakes 235  
The “121” Brake Standard  
This manual refers occasionally to “121”  
brakes. Although some operators believe  
“121” only applies to vehicles equipped  
with anti-lock devices, the “121” standard  
applies to all vehicles that are capable of  
on-highway operation.  
The “121” is a Federal requirement also  
covering alterations or changes to parts or  
systems related to the “121” standard once  
the vehicle has been placed in service. The  
owner and operator should be aware that it  
is a violation for any repair facility to make  
any part or component inoperative when it  
is required for “121” compliance.  
Charging Air To Another Vehicle  
There are many methods which may be  
used to charge the air system of another ve-  
hicle. Vehicles equipped with the standard  
two-valve system (trailer supply and  
parking brake) must use the following pro-  
cedure when using the emergency trailer air  
line as an auxiliary air source, other than to  
charge the trailer air reservoirs.  
Before working on a vehicle, set the  
parking brakes, place the transmission in  
neutral, and block the wheels. Failure to  
do so can result in unexpected vehicle  
movement and can cause serious per-  
sonal injury or death.  
1
2
Connect the emergency trailer air line  
to the auxiliary source.  
Start the engine.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
236 Brakes  
Antilock Braking System (ABS)  
The vehicle has a standard brake system,  
equipped with an electronic speed monitor-  
ing and control system, Antilock Braking  
System (ABS). ABS monitors wheel speed  
continuously but is not involved in control-  
ling the wheel speed unless there is an  
emergency. In normal braking applications,  
the standard air brake system is in effect.  
WARNING  
For proper ABS operation, do not  
change tire sizes. The size of the tires  
installed during production are pro-  
grammed into the electronic control unit.  
Installing different sized tires could re-  
sult in a reduced brake force, leading to  
longer stopping distances or accidents.  
There is a sensor installed in each wheel on  
a monitored axle. The sensors transmit in-  
formation to the electronic control unit  
(ECU). The ECU interprets the signals and  
calculates wheel speed, wheel retardation  
and a vehicle reference speed. If the calcu-  
lations indicate a wheel lock-up situation, a  
signal is sent from the ECU to the appropri-  
ate ABS modulator valve to reduce braking  
pressure. During emergency braking, the  
modulator valve alternately reduces, in-  
creases or maintains air pressure in the  
brake chamber to prevent wheel lock-up.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Brakes 237  
During emergency or reduced-traction  
stops, fully depress the foot brake pedal un-  
til the vehicle comes to a safe stop. DO  
NOT PUMP the brake pedal. With the  
brake pedal fully depressed, the ABS will  
control all wheels to provide steering con-  
trol and a reduced braking distance.  
Although the ABS improves vehicle control  
during emergency braking situations, the  
operator still has the responsibility to  
change driving styles depending on the  
existing traffic, road and/or weather condi-  
tions. For example, the ABS cannot prevent  
an accident if the driver is speeding or fol-  
lowing too closely on slippery surfaces.  
The ABS control unit contains a self-  
testing program that is engaged each time  
the ignition is turned on. The operator can  
verify the testing by listening for the ABS  
modulator valves actuating twice in series.  
To increase the sound, hold down the foot  
brake pedal when the ignition is turned on.  
The self-test is not finished and the telltale  
will stay on until the vehicle has started to  
move. The wheel speed sensors are tested  
when the vehicle starts to move. If they test  
OK, the telltale will go out at approxi-  
mately 7 mph (11 km/h).  
WARNING  
If any of the ABS telltales come on dur-  
ing driving or do not go out after a short  
time after turning on the ignition, take  
the vehicle to a Volvo Truck dealer to  
repair the ABS or brake system. The ve-  
hicle can still be driven with a problem  
in the ABS system. However, ABS will  
not be working and the standard braking  
system will be in effect.  
W3000905  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
238 Brakes  
Traction Control System (TCS) (option)  
The Traction Control System (TCS) uses  
the same wheel sensors as the ABS to de-  
termine if one set of drive wheels is  
spinning much more rapidly than the wheel  
set on the other side. If the TCS determines  
that a wheel is spinning (with vehicle speed  
below 25 mph [40 km/h]), it operates the  
brake system to apply some brake force to  
stop the spinning wheel(s). This puts the  
drive power over to the stationary wheel(s).  
W3000962  
If vehicle speed is above 25 mph  
(40 km/h), a signal is sent to the engine  
ECU, which reduces the engine speed to be  
consistent with vehicle speed. This action  
helps reduce the amount of wheel spin and  
gives the operator greater vehicle control.  
The TCS includes a switch to turn off the  
function. When the switch is in the OFF  
position, the TCS operates normally to in-  
crease traction if the drive wheels are  
spinning. When the switch is pressed once,  
the TCS telltale in the instrument cluster  
blinks continuously, indicating that the TCS  
is in mud/snow mode.  
W3001336  
The mud/snow mode increases available  
traction on soft surfaces like snow, slush or  
mud by slightly increasing the allowable  
wheel spin. This prevents the wheels from  
getting bogged down. The TCS will resume  
normal operation when the TCS switch is  
pressed again and the TCS telltale goes out  
or when the ignition is turned off.  
CAUTION  
Do not engage the differential locks  
while wheels are spinning. Serious dam-  
age to the differential will occur. See  
page 258 for more information.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Brakes 239  
Vehicle Speed Retardation Devices  
When operating a tractor bobtail (with-  
out a trailer) or on slippery roads, the  
engine brake switch must be in the  
OFF” position. Failure to follow this  
instruction can result in loss of vehicle  
control and serious personal injury or  
death.  
WARNING  
A vehicle speed retardation device (such  
as a “Jake-Brake,” “C-Brake,” “Exhaust  
Brake,” etc.) is not intended to bring the  
vehicle to a stop. A vehicle speed retar-  
dation device is only intended to retard  
the vehicle speed under certain condi-  
tions.  
NOTE! If a Volvo engine is equipped with  
a Volvo Engine Brake, the brake will not  
operate with full power until the engine  
coolant temperature has reached 110 F  
(45 C).  
NOTE! It is normal for there to be a slight  
delay in the application of a vehicle speed  
retardation device. When using devices of  
this type, be sure to think ahead and ana-  
lyze conditions in order to use the device  
properly.  
Failure to observe the above precautions  
can result in loss of vehicle control and  
serious personal injury or death.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
240 Brakes  
Volvo Exhaust Brake  
The exhaust brake is standard on the Volvo  
D12 engine. It is used to reduce wear on  
the brake linings. The exhaust brake is  
most effective at high engine speeds (1500  
to 2300 r/min). The exhaust brake is auto-  
matically disengaged if the engine speed  
drops to or below 1100 r/min.  
The exhaust brake works by containing the  
exhaust gases in the exhaust manifold,  
thereby making the engine work against the  
back pressure. This provides a retarding  
force on the drive wheels.  
The exhaust brake is operated by a two-  
position switch in the right-hand switch  
cluster. For the exhaust brake to function,  
the following must be in effect:  
The switch is ON  
Accelerator and clutch pedals are fully  
released  
W3001324  
Engine speed exceeds 1100 r/min  
When the cruise control is engaged, the ex-  
haust brake automatically engages if the  
selected cruise speed is exceeded by ap-  
proximately 5 mph (8 km/h). The exhaust  
brake is then disengaged when the speed  
has returned to approximately 3 mph (5  
km/h) above selected cruise speed.  
NOTE! For both exhaust and engine  
brakes, use a “one gear” driving strategy  
when going downhill to keep engine speed  
up for effective braking (for example: up-  
hill in 7th gear and downhill in 6th).  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Brakes 241  
Volvo Engine Brake (option)  
The Volvo Engine Brake (VEB) has a  
higher braking effect than the exhaust  
brake. The engine brake is most effective at  
high engine speeds (1500 to 2300 r/min). It  
is automatically disengaged if engine speed  
drops below 1100 r/min.  
The engine brake function is operated by  
one switch in the right hand switch cluster.  
It works together with the exhaust brake to  
provide two levels of braking power. The  
switch has three positions: OFF, LOW and  
HIGH. With the switch in position LOW,  
only the exhaust brake is engaged. With the  
switch in position HIGH, both the exhaust  
brake and the compression brake are acti-  
vated. For the engine brake to function, the  
following must be in effect:  
W3002303  
The switch is ON  
Vehicle speed over 7.5 mph (12 km/h)  
Engine temperature over 110 F (43 C)  
Accelerator and clutch pedals are fully  
released  
Engine speed over 1100 r/min  
When the cruise control is engaged, the en-  
gine brake automatically engages if the  
selected cruise speed is exceeded by ap-  
proximately 5 mph (8 km/h). The engine  
brake is then disengaged when the speed  
has returned to approximately 3 mph  
(5 km/h) above selected cruise speed.  
Too Cold for Engine Brake (Volvo Engine Only)  
Position 2 of the engine brake should not  
be switched on until the engine has become  
warm (over 110 F [45 C]). If position 2 is  
selected and the engine is too cold, this  
symbol will be shown (however, VEB is  
not activated).  
T3009355  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
242 Brakes  
Jake-Brake Or C-Brake  
The Jake-Brake or C-Brake is optional  
equipment for Cummins, and Detroit en-  
gines. These engine brakes are similar in  
operation. Three power levels are available  
by engaging 2, 4, or 6 cylinders when brak-  
ing (for Cummins M11, only two power  
levels are available).  
It is operated by two switches in the right  
hand switch cluster. It works together with  
the exhaust brake to provide two levels of  
braking power. The left switch is the  
ON/OFF switch. The desired braking power  
is selected with the right switch which has  
three positions: LOW, MED and HIGH (for  
Cummins M11, only LOW and HIGH).  
W3002303  
For the exhaust brake to function, the fol-  
lowing must be in effect:  
The switch is ON  
Vehicle speed over 7.5 mph (12 km/h)  
Engine temperature over 110 F (43 C)  
Accelerator and clutch pedals fully re-  
leased  
Engine speed exceeding 1100 r/min  
When the cruise control is engaged, the ex-  
haust brake automatically engages if the  
selected cruise speed is exceeded by ap-  
proximately 5 mph (8 km/h). The exhaust  
brake is then disengaged when the speed  
has returned to approximately 3 mph  
(5 km/h) above the selected cruise speed.  
For more information, read the Jake-Brake  
or C-Brake operator’s manual.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Brakes 243  
Transmission Retarder  
The Transmission Retarder is an option  
with Allison HD and MD transmissions. It  
is activated by an on/off switch in the aux-  
iliary panel and is controlled by a stalk  
switch mounted in front of the wiper  
switch. You can set 6 different levels with  
the stalk switch.  
W3004428  
Do not use the retarder on wet or slip-  
pery roads. The retarder may cause  
vehicle to slide and cause an accident  
which could result in injury or death.  
NOTE! The retarder is automatically  
disabled when the ABS (antilock brake sys-  
tem) is active.  
W3004405  
NOTE! Vehicle brake lights are always on  
when transmission retarder is applied.  
CAUTION  
Apply the retarder only when engine is  
at closed throttle.  
CAUTION  
Observe transmission and engine tem-  
peratures. Select the lowest possible  
transmission range in order to maximize  
the cooling system capacity and retarda-  
tion. If overheating occurs, decrease the  
use of the retarder and use service  
brakes instead. Check the retarder  
overtemp light.  
For complete warnings and instructions, re-  
fer to your Allison Transmission manual.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
244 Electrical System  
Electrical System  
General Safety Guidelines  
CAUTION  
WARNING  
Electronic circuits and components are  
designed to sense voltage differences  
smaller than 1 volt. While static electric-  
ity is not normally dangerous to humans,  
it can seriously damage electronic cir-  
cuits and components. Circuit boards  
mounted in the instrument cluster, for  
example, may not fail immediately after  
being hit with a static discharge. Rather,  
they may work for a while and then fail  
for no apparent reason. Therefore, al-  
ways work with proper grounding straps  
and antistatic mats around electric com-  
ponents.  
Failure to repair a malfunction in the  
electrical system can result in serious  
damage due to vehicle fire. Always let an  
experienced electrical technician perform  
repairs. Always determine the source of  
the fault; do not just treat the symptoms.  
WARNING  
Always wear eye protection when work-  
ing around batteries to prevent the risk  
of injury due to contact with sulfuric  
acid or an explosion.  
CAUTION  
WARNING  
Today’s vehicles contain a high number  
of electronic devices. It is very impor-  
tant to exercise caution when working  
on a modern electrical system, charging  
batteries or jump starting the engine. To  
minimize the risk of any damage to the  
electronic components, follow the proce-  
dures below when work is being done to  
the electrical system.  
Before replacing a damaged fuse, turn  
off all functions for that circuit. Damage  
to the circuit can happen. Always re-  
place fuses and circuit breakers with the  
same current/amperage rating. Never  
substitute a fuse with foil, wire or nails.  
Increasing fuse or circuit breaker ratings  
or substituting a fuse with foil, wire or  
nails may result in electrical circuit  
overheating and possibly fire.  
NOTE! Do not work on the electric system  
without proper tools and training. Repair-  
work to the electrical system must be done  
by trained professionals. Your Volvo Truck  
dealer has the right tools and trained tech-  
nicians.  
CAUTION  
Attempting to work on electronic com-  
ponents without proper equipment can  
damage internal parts with static elec-  
tricity.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Electrical System 245  
Charging System  
An alternator with an integrated regulator is  
used to supply power to the vehicle electri-  
cal system. The charging system voltage  
should be checked periodically to prevent  
overcharging or undercharging the batteries  
and to detect any voltage drop in the wiring.  
W8002769  
Battery Box  
The battery cover may also be a base for  
the cab steps. To remove the cover, unhook  
the two rubber latches and lift the cover up  
and out.  
When installing the battery cover, make  
sure it is resting properly on the box  
before fastening the latches. Faulty in-  
stallation may cause the cover to shift  
when the steps are used, which may lead  
to a fall, causing serious personal injury  
or death.  
W3002421  
When inspecting or cleaning batteries,  
never smoke or expose batteries (or the  
areas around them) to spark or flames.  
The battery area may contain an explo-  
sive gas mixture that can ignite, causing  
an explosion, leading to serious personal  
injury or death.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
246 Electrical System  
There may be three or four batteries in-  
stalled. Always make sure the batteries are  
fastened properly in the box.  
When disconnecting battery terminals, al-  
ways disconnect the main ground terminal  
first. When reconnecting, always connect  
the main ground terminal last.  
W3002368  
WARNING  
Battery posts, terminals and related ac-  
cessories contain lead compounds,  
chemicals known to the state of Califor-  
nia to cause cancer and reproductive  
harm. Wash hands after handling.  
There are two styles of battery boxes avail-  
able. One is covered with a plastic cover  
and the other cover is made of chromed di-  
amond plated steel.  
W3004389  
W3004390  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Electrical System 247  
Battery Jump Starting and Charging  
To access the batteries on a vehicle  
equipped with side fairings, open the fair-  
ing access cover. On the second battery  
from the front there are special, longer  
posts installed to accept jumper cables.  
When jumping batteries to start an engine,  
it is important that the jumper cables are  
connected directly from one set of batteries  
in one vehicle to the other set of batteries  
in the other vehicle (unless vehicle is  
equipped with optional Emergency Start  
System). This way the cranking current is  
carried through the proper starter wiring.  
W3004391  
Connect the jumper cables to the positive,  
or “hot” terminal first and ground terminal  
last. When disconnecting the cables, dis-  
connect the ground terminal first. Connect  
the jumper cable clamps to the discharged  
battery first and to the booster battery last.  
Avoid creating sparks by making all con-  
nections quickly and firmly. Do not permit  
vehicles to touch each other when jump  
starting.  
Do not attempt to jump-start a vehicle  
equipped with Delco Maintenance Free  
batteries if the test indicator is light yel-  
low. Replace the battery instead.  
W3002432  
Jump-starting may cause battery to ex-  
plode causing skin burns from acid or  
serious personal injury or death.  
WARNING  
Always wear eye protection when work-  
ing around batteries to prevent the risk  
of injury due to contact with sulfuric  
acid or an explosion.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
248 Electrical System  
Charging the Battery  
High voltage machines that are used for  
work on the vehicle can do damage to the  
electrical system, especially to its electronic  
components. Welding or quick-charging  
machines subject the wiring to excessive  
voltage, which may often result in damage  
to electrical and electronic components  
anywhere on the vehicle.  
CAUTION  
Attempting to work on electronic com-  
ponents without proper equipment can  
damage internal parts with static elec-  
tricity.  
Do not work on the electrical system  
without the proper tools and training. Re-  
pairwork to the electrical system must  
always be done by trained professionals.  
Your Volvo Truck dealer has the right tools  
and trained technicians.  
Jump Starting the Engine  
If the batteries are discharged to the point  
where they do not have enough stored en-  
ergy to start the engine, they should be  
recharged using a low charge current, not  
to exceed 16 volts.  
If the vehicle needs to be started immedi-  
ately, use starting batteries. Connect the  
batteries according to the information on  
the previous page.  
DO NOT use battery chargers with  
“boosting” capability. These produce a high  
voltage current that will cause damage to  
the vehicle electrical and electronic  
components.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Electrical System 249  
Electronic Components  
CAUTION  
Electronic circuits and components are  
designed to sense voltage differences  
smaller than 1 volt. While static electric-  
ity is not normally dangerous to humans,  
it can seriously damage electronic cir-  
cuits and components. Circuit boards  
mounted in the instrument cluster may  
not fail immediately after being hit with  
a static discharge. Rather, they may work  
for a while and then fail for no apparent  
reason. Therefore, always work with  
proper grounding straps and antistatic  
mats around electronic components.  
Welding  
CAUTION  
Welding on the vehicle can damage the  
electrical system or components due to  
the high voltage and current spikes that  
normally occur when welding. It is  
preferable to avoid welding on an as-  
sembled vehicle. However, if any  
structure on or in contact with the  
vehicle must be welded, follow the rec-  
ommendations below.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
250 Electrical System  
CAUTION  
If there are other ground cables con-  
nected to the battery (such as engine  
ECU, etc.), disconnect those ground ca-  
bles first, then remove the main battery  
ground cable. Electronic modules may  
be damaged when additional grounds are  
connected/disconnected without the  
main battery ground connected. Discon-  
nect the main battery ground last.  
Before welding on the vehicle, electrical  
power needs to be disconnected and some  
components must also be disconnected:  
Disconnect both the negative (-) and  
positive (+) battery cables. Disconnect  
the negative cable first. Reconnect the  
positive cable first.  
T8006862  
Disconnect engine/starter ground from  
the chassis. This connection is located  
outside the left hand frame rail in the  
engine compartment.  
Disconnect the power harness and ve-  
hicle interface harness at the engine  
electronic control unit (EECU).  
If the vehicle is equipped with systems  
that have their own ECUs (such as the  
vehicle ECU (VECU), ABS system,  
air bag or some transmission systems),  
disconnect each ECU at their electrical  
connection.  
Disconnect the electrical connections  
at the rear of the instrument cluster.  
Reposition or shield any parts that  
would be damaged by high  
temperatures.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Electrical System 251  
Attach the welder ground cable as  
close to the weld area as possible (6  
inches or less from the place being  
welded).  
Do not connect the welder ground ca-  
ble to the EECU or its cooling plate.  
Welding cables should not be allowed  
to lay on, near or cross over any elec-  
trical wiring or electronic component  
during the welding procedure.  
After finishing welding and the welded  
areas having cooled, inspect wiring  
and components for possible shorts or  
damage. In the event of a short circuit,  
excessive current will be drawn when  
the batteries are reconnected, causing  
more damage to the electrical system.  
CAUTION  
Do not weld on the engine or engine  
components. Welding on the engine or  
components mounted on the engine can  
cause serious damage to the engine  
ECU.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
252 Electrical System  
Battery Protection System (option)  
An electronic battery monitor (“Battery  
Lifeguard”) may be installed in the electri-  
cal center. This monitor will disconnect  
certain circuits if it senses that the battery  
voltage falls under a safe charging level.  
Before disconnecting, the monitor will  
sound a loud and distinct alarm, alternating  
long and short beeps, for approximately  
60 seconds.  
At the end of the alarm, the monitor discon-  
nects circuits to protect the batteries. When  
the batteries are charged, either through the  
vehicle alternator or a connected battery  
charger, the monitor will automatically re-  
store power to the disconnected circuits.  
Disconnected circuits are connected to fuse  
positions F15 through 35. These circuits are  
primarily feeding the sleeper area and  
headlights.  
W3002365  
Unless the batteries are held at an elevated  
voltage for several hours, they will only de-  
velop a “surface” charge. That charge will  
quickly go away and the relay will retrip.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Electrical System 253  
Electrical Center  
W8000923  
The electrical center is located in the mid-  
dle of the dash. All the relays and fuses in  
the cab are collected here. The cover panels  
are fastened with screws that can be turned  
with a coin. Since the function of some  
fuses or relays may change for the vehicle  
application, refer to the list of functions that  
is attached to the underside of each panel.  
All fuses and relays are accessible under  
the top cover.  
W3002514  
Fuses are standard. Reset breakers are avail-  
able as an option for some circuits. If a fuse  
continues to melt or disconnect, the circuit  
has a malfunction and must be repaired.  
WARNING  
Failure to repair a malfunction in the  
electrical system can result in serious  
damage due to vehicle fire.  
If a breaker disconnects, the ignition or  
main switch must be switched off before  
the breaker resets.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
254 Electrical System  
The fuses and relays are all accessible un-  
der the top cover on the dash.  
W3002526  
One type of fuse in the new electrical cen-  
ter are termed “mini-fuses” and require a  
puller tool to remove from the fuse block.  
The puller tool is part of the Owner’s Pack-  
age. To order a new puller, use part number  
20378326.  
W3002525  
Mini-fuse puller tool  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Electrical System 255  
Power Studs  
On the passenger side of the dash are  
power studs for a CB hook-up. These studs  
are standard equipment. For a proper hook-  
up, use fork type connectors on the wires  
or use “banana” plugs.  
CAUTION  
If stripped wire ends are used, make  
sure there are no wire strands that can  
bridge between the studs.  
W3002001  
The red stud is the positive terminal and  
the black stud is the ground terminal.  
Power from the studs must not exceed a  
10 amp draw. Before connecting any elec-  
trical accessory, make sure it is made for  
12 V operation.  
The top tray is available as a CB mount  
with a strap to hold different size radios se-  
curely in place.  
W8001876  
12 Volt Power Outlets  
There are a number of 12 V outlets that  
can be accessed in the cab. On the dash,  
there are cigar lighter and CB power studs  
as possible 12 V outlets.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
256 Power Steering  
General  
The power steering consists of an inte-  
grated gear and hydraulic power cylinder,  
and a power steering pump with fluid con-  
tainer. The pump, driven by the engine,  
provides hydraulic pressure to the power  
steering. If the engine is not working, the  
steering is only manual. With the power  
steering not working, the effort required to  
turn the steering wheel is much greater  
than with power assist. If the power steer-  
ing assist fails, bring the vehicle to a safe  
stop. Do not drive the vehicle until correct-  
ing the cause of the problem.  
Do not drive the vehicle without power  
assisted steering. When the power assist  
has failed, the effort to turn the steering  
wheel is much greater, especially in  
sharp turns or at low speeds. This can  
cause an accident and lead to serious  
personal injury or death.  
While operating the vehicle, avoid ruts and  
obstructions which cause a binding condi-  
tion on the sides of the front wheels. Drive  
the vehicle out of the rut, then turn the  
steering wheel. If possible, avoid turning  
the wheels while the vehicle is at a stand-  
still as this places a considerable load on  
the power steering system and front axle.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Power Steering 257  
Periodically check the power steering fluid  
reservoir and keep it filled to the proper  
level with the recommended fluid. See the  
Operator’s Manual, Maintenance and En-  
gine” for more information.  
There is also a filter inside the reservoir  
that needs to be changed every 12 months.  
W6001428  
Adjustable Steering Column (option)  
The steering column is fixed as standard.  
An adjustable steering column is available  
as an option. The adjustment device is op-  
erated by a pedal on the left side of the  
floor. To make adjustments, depress the  
pedal and move the steering column to the  
desired position and then release the pedal.  
W6000876  
Do not try to make adjustments to the  
steering wheel while the vehicle is mov-  
ing. Make all adjustments before starting  
to drive. Adjusting steering column  
while driving could cause loss of vehicle  
control leading to severe personal injury  
or death.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
258 Axles and Wheels  
Axles  
Differential Locks  
The drive axle(s) may be equipped with  
differential locks. The single drive axle will  
only have a wheel differential lock. With  
tandem drive axles, there could be both  
wheel differential locks and an inter-axle  
differential lock.  
CAUTION  
Never operate the vehicle with the dif-  
ferentials locked any longer than is  
necessary as this places a great strain on  
the axles and may cause rapid tire wear.  
The differential lock should be used on icy  
or slippery surfaces. As soon as the  
slippery surface has been passed, the differ-  
ential lock should be disengaged.  
Differential locks must not, under any cir-  
cumstances, be engaged when in a  
wheel-spin situation. Engage the locks  
ahead of the slippery area. If already slip-  
ping, stop the wheels, engage the locks and  
then continue. If the differential locks are  
engaged when the wheels are spinning, the  
differential will be damaged and the rear  
axle drive unit could possibly fail.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Axles and Wheels 259  
Engaging the differential locks must always  
be done in the following way (see page 104  
for switch location):  
1
Depress the clutch pedal. Wait for the  
drive wheels to stop spinning  
Engage the differential lock  
Engage a suitable gear  
2
3
4
W3001991  
Carefully release the clutch pedal  
Do not drive on dry, paved surface with  
the differential locks engaged. The vehi-  
cle will strive to maintain a straight line.  
Taking a curve with the differential locks  
engaged may cause an accident, leading  
to serious personal injury or death.  
Under normal traction conditions, do not  
engage the differential locks. If at all possi-  
ble, do not use the differential locks while  
taking a curve. With good traction and the  
differential locks engaged, the vehicle will  
be understeered and therefore will tend to  
drive straight in a curve. When using locks  
on good traction surface, drive cautiously  
and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h). Dis-  
engage the locks as soon as possible.  
When the differential locks are disengaged,  
the couplings may be under tension. Disen-  
gage the locks by returning the switch to  
the OFF position. Help with the disengage-  
ment by briefly letting up on the accelerator  
to relieve the torque on the couplings.  
The telltales for the differential locks are in  
the instrument cluster. See page 80 for  
more information on the telltales.  
W3000904  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
260 Axles and Wheels  
Auxiliary Lift Axle  
Before raising or lowering any of the  
auxiliary axles, be certain no one can be  
trapped by the axle movement. Failure  
to do so can result in a person being  
trapped between the wheel and the body,  
or between the wheel and the ground,  
resulting in serious personal injury or  
death.  
W3004429  
Vehicles may be equipped with auxiliary  
lift axles. The lift mechanism operates with  
air pressure. To lower or raise the axle(s),  
press the top part of the switch in to raise  
the axle and press the lower part of the  
switch in to lower the axle.  
Regulators for adjusting the air spring pres-  
sure are located on the outside of the cab,  
below the rear corner of the driver side  
door. Regulators are operated by turning the  
knob counter clockwise for lowering pres-  
sure, and clockwise for increasing pressure.  
CAUTION  
Do not rely on gauges to determine  
axle pressure. Weight must be verified  
on scales, and pressure in the air springs  
should then be adjusted accordingly.  
W7001173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Axles and Wheels 261  
Wheels  
General  
Due to the size, equipment needed and the  
procedures used to change wheels, this  
should be done through the Volvo Truck  
dealer. By having an expert technician per-  
form this procedure, personal injury and  
property damage may be avoided.  
NOTE! When replacing the wheel equip-  
ment or tires, use the same size wheels or  
tires as originally manufactured. Changing  
the tire or wheel size will affect brake per-  
formance. If changing tire size, ABS and  
speedometer must be recalibrated.  
Check Tightening Wheel Nuts  
Failure to properly torque-tighten the  
wheel nuts can result in the breakage of  
wheel studs and the subsequent loss of  
wheels. Loss of vehicle control and seri-  
ous personal injury or death can occur.  
Check tighten all wheel nuts after the first  
50 to 100 miles (80 to 160 km) and the  
first 50 to 100 miles (80 to 160 km) after  
each tire service. This applies to both sin-  
gle and dual wheels in connection with  
normal service but should be performed at  
least every six months.  
W7001132  
This check tightening is particularly impor-  
tant when rims or brake drums are newly  
painted. Paint can flake off from these sur-  
faces, causing the nuts to lose their grip  
and the wheel to loosen.  
See the “Operator’s Manual, Maintenance  
and Engine” for correct procedures on  
tightening the wheel nuts.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
262 Axles and Wheels  
Inflating Tires  
Always check inflation pressures when the  
tires are cool, using an accurate tire pres-  
sure gauge. Check the pressures at regular  
intervals.  
CAUTION  
Never bleed the air from hot tires. In-  
creased tire pressure measured in a hot  
tire is normal. Lower than recommended  
pressures may cause side wall flexing re-  
sulting in increased tire heat. This may  
cause premature tire failure.  
W7000437  
Tires and wheels must be serviced only  
by a qualified technician. Do not attempt  
to perform this work yourself. Inflated  
tires on wheels contain compressed air  
and if suddenly released, do so with an  
explosive force. Serious personal injury  
or death can occur.  
For specific information and warranty on  
rims and tires, contact the tire manufac-  
turer’s distributor. Check tires for abnormal  
wear. Also, check the tread depth.  
W7000773  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Axles and Wheels 263  
Wheel Bearing Adjustment  
For reliable operation and adequate service  
life, the wheel bearings must be properly  
adjusted and checked during the service pe-  
riod. Loose wheel bearings could cause  
premature tire wear and possibly affect ve-  
hicle handling. See your Volvo Truck  
dealer for proper servicing.  
Watch carefully for oil leaks and listen for  
unusual noises. These are indications of  
worn bearings, bad seals or misadjusted  
bearings. These are problems which must  
be corrected as soon as possible.  
W7000438  
Failure to keep wheel bearings properly  
adjusted may result in accelerated tire  
wear, poor handling and, in extreme  
cases, wheel separation from the hub or  
from the spindle.  
It is important that wheel bearings are  
checked and adjusted regularly. Failure  
to properly maintain these bearings can  
ultimately result in loss of vehicle con-  
trol and cause serious personal injury or  
death.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
264 Fifth Wheel Instructions  
Fifth Wheel General Information  
The standard fifth wheel is manufactured  
by ASF. Other fifth wheels available as op-  
tions are Holland and Fontaine.  
Things to think about with trailer hook-up:  
Check the load distribution between  
axles.  
Always chock the trailer wheels.  
Grease the plate. No grease on the  
plate will produce heavy steering.  
Verify visually that coupling has oc-  
curred.  
Verify visually that plungers have  
locked on slider.  
Check for slack between the 5th wheel  
and the trailer kingpin.  
Always have all fifth wheel maintenance  
and repairs done by a qualified techni-  
cian. An incorrect repair can cause the  
trailer to separate from the tractor caus-  
ing an accident with serious personal  
injury or death.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fifth Wheel Instructions 265  
Safety Information  
Follow the instructions on the advisory la-  
bels attached to the various manufacturers’  
fifth wheels. An operator’s manual from the  
manufacturer is supplied with each fifth  
wheel and is provided in the Owner’s pack-  
age.  
W9000183  
If the fifth wheel is equipped with a sliding  
mounting, follow the advisory labels at-  
tached to the component. Also, read the  
literature provided by the manufacturer.  
W9000185  
Always keep the fifth wheel plate well  
lubricated to prevent binding between  
the tractor and trailer. A binding fifth  
wheel could cause erratic steering and  
loss of vehicle control that may result in  
serious personal injury or death.  
W9000198  
Fifth Wheel  
There are three operating positions for the  
fifth wheel locking mechanism (ASF fifth  
wheel is shown):  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
266 Fifth Wheel Instructions  
Locked — This is the position that the fifth  
wheel will be in with a trailer hooked up.  
In the locked position, the operating rod is  
retracted and the safety latch will freely  
swing back and forth.  
W9000180  
W9000242  
W9000203  
Lockset — This is the position the fifth  
wheel is in when uncoupling the trailer. To  
achieve the lockset position, the operating  
rod is pulled out with a slight upward mo-  
tion. The operating rod shoulder will catch  
on the plate casting. The safety latch is ro-  
tated toward the rear of the fifth wheel.  
Open — This is the position the fifth  
wheel is in after the trailer is uncoupled.  
The jaw is open and the operating rod is  
now dropped down and can be freely  
moved around. The safety latch is rotated  
toward the rear of the fifth wheel. This is  
the position the fifth wheel must be in  
when being coupled to a trailer.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fifth Wheel Instructions 267  
Fifth Wheel Slider (option)  
The fifth wheel comes standard with an air  
operational slider. To remain within legal  
weight limits, this feature allows the driver  
to distribute the load easily on the axles.  
The air operated slider takes the work out  
of adjusting the tractor for various trailer  
loads. The fifth wheel portion is easily ad-  
justed, even with a fully loaded trailer  
connected.  
Movement between the adjustable saddle  
plate and the stationary base plate rail can  
result in wear, causing longitudinal, latitu-  
dinal and vertical slack. Field repairs can  
be made to reduce this slack for additional  
service life.  
W9000205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
268 Fifth Wheel Instructions  
Unlocking the Fifth Wheel  
Always check out the entire fifth wheel  
equipment before attempting to couple to a  
trailer (ASF fifth wheel is shown):  
If not lubricated properly, add grease  
to the top of the fifth wheel plate.  
Make sure the mounting of the fifth  
wheel to the frame is tight and in good  
condition.  
If using a sliding fifth wheel, make  
sure the slide locking plungers are in a  
locked position.  
The following instructions are for preparing  
the fifth wheel for coupling to a trailer:  
Rotate the safety latch toward the rear of  
the fifth wheel.  
W9000180  
Using a slight upward motion, pull the op-  
erating rod out until the operating rod  
shoulder is outside the fifth wheel operating  
slot.  
W9000202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fifth Wheel Instructions 269  
When the shoulder of the operating rod is  
outside of the operating slot, raise the oper-  
ating rod handle to its maximum upward  
position.  
W9000242  
Release the operating rod. The upper shoul-  
der of the operating rod should now be in  
contact with the plate casting above the op-  
erating slot. The fifth wheel is now in the  
lockset position and a trailer can be  
coupled.  
W9000274  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
270 Fifth Wheel Instructions  
Trailer Coupling Procedures  
This procedure covers vehicles with and  
without air suspension.  
Failure to properly couple the tractor  
and trailer can result in their separation,  
causing death and property damage. It is  
important that the operating procedures  
contained in this manual are fully under-  
stood and closely followed.  
W8001449  
Using the following procedures, inspect the  
equipment before coupling to a trailer:  
Make sure the fifth wheel is properly lubri-  
cated and the jaw is in the open position.  
WARNING  
If the jaw is not in the open position,  
use a pry bar to rotate the jaw to the  
open position. The lock is spring loaded.  
Keep hands away to avoid injury.  
Use a pry bar to open the fifth wheel jaw,  
if necessary.  
W8001450  
Make sure the plate is tilted downward to  
the proper position at the rear.  
W9000236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fifth Wheel Instructions 271  
Make sure the mounting of the fifth wheel  
to the tractor frame is tight and in good  
condition.  
If using a sliding fifth wheel, make sure the  
slide locking plungers are fully engaged.  
W9000205  
Chock the trailer wheels. Use two chocks  
(both on the front and rear of the wheel) on  
both sides of the trailer.  
W9000263  
Back up close to the trailer, centering the  
kingpin on the throat of the fifth wheel, and  
STOP.  
NOTE! For tractors with air ride suspen-  
sion, make sure the suspension control  
switch is in the “RIDE” position (switch  
pushed in at the top) and the air springs are  
inflated.  
W3001341  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
272 Fifth Wheel Instructions  
Connect the air brake lines and the electri-  
cal power cord. Make sure that any slack in  
the lines is supported so that the brake lines  
do not become entangled. Set the trailer  
brakes by pulling out the Trailer Supply  
control on the dashboard.  
W5000713  
Check to see that the trailer is at the proper  
height for coupling. The leading edge of  
the trailer plate should initially contact the  
fifth wheel top plate surface about 8 in.  
(200 mm) behind the pivot point as the  
tractor backs under the trailer. Raise or  
lower the trailer landing gear as required to  
obtain this position.  
W9000237  
WARNING  
Attempting to couple with the trailer at  
an improper height could result in a  
false or improper couple and cause dam-  
age to the tractor, fifth wheel and trailer.  
Back under the trailer, keeping the trailer  
kingpin centered in the throat of the fifth  
wheel. After picking up the trailer — STOP  
— then continue backing until the fifth  
wheel locks firmly on the kingpin. Stopping  
helps prevent hitting the kingpin too hard.  
As an initial check, pull forward to test the  
completeness of the coupling.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fifth Wheel Instructions 273  
CAUTION  
A direct visual check is required to en-  
sure proper coupling. Several types of  
improper couplings will pass the initial  
pull test. Sound is not reliable. Do not  
take for granted that you are properly  
coupled. Get out of the cab and look.  
W9000286  
Failed trailer coupling  
Make sure the trailer kingpin is in the jaw  
slot and that the jaw is closed behind the  
pin. The kingpin should not overhang the  
fifth wheel or be caught in the grease  
groove.  
To verify that the kingpin is actually in the  
fifth wheel slot and the jaw is closed, the  
pin must be visually inspected from the  
rear. Use a flashlight if necessary.  
W9000181  
Make sure the trailer bed is resting on the  
top surface of the fifth wheel plate, and that  
there is no visible gap between the fifth  
wheel and the trailer bed plate.  
W9000240  
Proper pick-up and coupling to a trailer  
is a serious matter. A trailer that be-  
comes disconnected while in motion is  
extremely dangerous to other traffic and  
may result in death or severe personal  
injury. To ensure a positive hook-up or  
coupling, the procedures above should  
be followed in every case.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
274 Fifth Wheel Instructions  
Make sure the operating rod is fully re-  
tracted, the safety latch is positioned above  
the handle and the latch swings freely.  
If the fifth wheel is equipped with a manual  
secondary lock, check to see that it is prop-  
erly engaged.  
W9000180  
NOTE! If you cannot get a proper cou-  
pling, repeat this procedure. Do not use any  
fifth wheel which fails to operate properly.  
Check the kingpin to fifth wheel clearance  
by moving the tractor backward and for-  
ward with the trailer brakes set. If the  
clearance appears excessive (more than  
1/8 in. [3 mm]), or if the jaw does not lock,  
the fifth wheel should be inspected by a  
qualified technician before proceeding.  
Wind up the trailer landing gear (trailer  
support) to its fully retracted position. Fold  
down or remove the crank handle and place  
it in the crank handle holder.  
Check the air brake lines and the trailer  
light cord connections.  
Remove the wheel chocks from the trailer  
wheels.  
Proper pick-up and coupling to a trailer  
is a serious matter. A trailer that be-  
comes disconnected while in motion is  
extremely dangerous to other traffic and  
may result in death or severe personal  
injury. To ensure a positive hook-up or  
coupling, the procedures above should  
be followed in every case.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fifth Wheel Instructions 275  
Trailer Uncoupling Procedures  
For Tractors With Air Ride Suspension:  
Set the system park brake on the tractor.  
Set the trailer brakes by pulling out the  
trailer air supply knob.  
W5000921  
Chock the trailer wheels. Use two chocks  
(one on the front and one on the rear of the  
wheel) on both sides of the trailer.  
W9000263  
Wind down the landing gear until it touches  
the ground and then give it a few extra  
turns in low gear. Do not raise the trailer  
off of the fifth wheel. Fold down or remove  
the crank handle and place it in the crank  
handle holder.  
NOTE! In poor ground conditions, it may  
be necessary to provide a stable base for  
the landing gear.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
276 Fifth Wheel Instructions  
Disconnect the light cord and air brake  
lines. Use the dummy air couplings to keep  
foreign material from entering the brake  
lines.  
Unlock the fifth wheel.  
NOTE! If the operating rod is too difficult  
to pull, back the tractor up slightly to re-  
lieve any kingpin load against the fifth  
wheel jaw.  
W9000275  
Release the tractor park brakes and pull the  
tractor away from the kingpin about  
12 in. (300 mm) and STOP. Do not allow  
the fifth wheel to leave the underside of the  
trailer.  
W9000239  
Select the “UNCOUPLE” position (push  
down the latch and press in the bottom part  
of the switch) on the suspension control  
switch to deflate the air springs.  
W3001341  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fifth Wheel Instructions 277  
Wait about 30 seconds for the air springs to  
deflate.  
W9000238  
With the suspension lowered, pull clear of  
the trailer and immediately select the  
“RIDE” position (press the top part of the  
switch in) on the suspension control. This  
restores the suspension to operating height.  
CAUTION  
The vehicle must never be driven with  
the air springs deflated. Damage to air  
suspension parts will occur if springs are  
not inflated properly.  
W8001459  
After the trailer is uncoupled, the fifth  
wheel will be in the open position. The op-  
erating rod will drop and can be moved  
around freely.  
W9000203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
278 Fifth Wheel Instructions  
For Tractors Without Air Ride Suspension:  
Set the system park brake on the tractor.  
Set the trailer brakes by pulling out the  
trailer air supply knob.  
W5000921  
Chock the trailer wheels. Use two chocks  
(both on the front and rear of the wheel) on  
both sides of the trailer.  
W9000263  
Wind down the landing gear until it touches  
the ground and then give it a few extra  
turns in low gear. Do not raise the trailer  
off of the fifth wheel. Fold down or remove  
the crank handle and place it in the crank  
handle holder.  
NOTE! In poor ground conditions, it may  
be necessary to provide a stable base for  
the landing gear.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fifth Wheel Instructions 279  
Disconnect the light cord and air brake  
lines. Use the dummy air couplings to keep  
foreign material from entering the brake  
lines.  
Unlock the fifth wheel.  
NOTE! If the operating rod is too difficult  
to pull, back the tractor up slightly to re-  
lieve any kingpin load against the fifth  
wheel jaw.  
W9000275  
Release the tractor park brakes and slowly  
drive the tractor out from under the trailer.  
Let the trailer slide down the fifth wheel  
and pickup ramps.  
W9000239  
After the trailer is uncoupled, the fifth  
wheel will be in the open position. The op-  
erating rod will drop and can be moved  
around freely.  
W9000203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
280 Fifth Wheel Instructions  
Operating the Fifth Wheel Slider  
WARNING  
The trailer must be stopped and the  
trailer brakes locked, or damage to the  
tractor and/or trailer may result from un-  
controlled sliding of the fifth wheel.  
Stop the tractor and trailer in a straight line  
on level ground.  
Lock the trailer brakes by pulling out the  
Trailer Supply knob.  
Release the slide locking plungers by mov-  
ing the switch to the “UNLOCK” position  
(press down the latch and push in the bot-  
tom part of the switch).  
W3001346  
Check to see that both of the slide plungers  
have released. If the plungers do not come  
out, lower the landing gear to relieve the  
pressure on the plungers. Lowering the  
landing gear will also allow the fifth wheel  
to slide easier.  
W9000205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Fifth Wheel Instructions 281  
Slowly drive the tractor forward or back-  
ward to position the fifth wheel.  
After sliding the fifth wheel to the desired  
position, engage the slide locking plungers  
by moving the cab switch to the “LOCK”  
position (press in the top part of the switch).  
W8001459  
WARNING  
Do not operate the vehicle if the  
plungers are not fully engaged and the  
trailer landing gear is not fully retracted.  
Doing so may cause damage to the trac-  
tor, trailer and landing gear.  
Visually check to see that the slide  
plungers are fully engaged. It may be nec-  
essary to leave the trailer brakes locked and  
to move the tractor slightly to engage the  
slide plungers into the rail.  
Wind up the trailer landing gear to its fully  
retracted position.  
W9000205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
282 Emergency Information  
Towing Procedure  
General  
CAUTION  
The driveshaft must be removed before  
towing the vehicle. Failure to remove the  
driveshaft may result in damage to the  
transmission.  
Remove the drive shaft from the rear axle  
before moving the vehicle, unless it only  
needs to be moved a small distance for  
safety reasons. When the transmission is  
driven from the rear wheels without the en-  
gine running, there is no lubrication in the  
transmission.  
T0006670  
Axle shafts must be removed if the vehicle  
is to be towed at speeds over 25 mph  
(40 km/h) or for a long distance. Openings  
should be covered to prevent loss of oil and  
entry of dirt and grit. Where oil-lubricated  
bearings are used, openings should be thor-  
oughly sealed with metal discs and new  
gaskets before towing.  
WARNING  
If a vehicle with air suspension is lifted  
by the rear frame member, there is a risk  
that the air springs will separate from  
the spring plates. When towing has been  
completed, do not under any circum-  
stances use your hands to reposition the  
air springs. There is a great risk that  
your hand will be caught between spring  
and plate causing personal injury.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Emergency Information 283  
WARNING  
Do not tow a vehicle backwards when  
equipped with roof air fairings. The fair-  
ings act as an air scoop and may break  
off. Failure to follow this warning may  
lead to personal injury and vehicle dam-  
age.  
WARNING  
Vehicles with air fairings or large super-  
structures are tall. Make sure that the  
total height of the vehicle, when it is  
raised up behind the wrecker, does not  
exceed the maximum allowed height for  
local underpasses. Failure to follow this  
instruction may lead to personal injury  
and vehicle damage.  
The vehicle may now be towed. It is rec-  
ommended that a wrecker with a lift bar is  
used since the service brakes will not func-  
tion. The system must be filled with air to  
release the parking brake or follow the me-  
chanical spring brake caging procedures on  
page 285.  
NOTE! The power steering does not func-  
tion when towing a vehicle with a disabled  
engine.  
W1000075  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
284 Emergency Information  
Towing Instructions  
WARNING  
If the vehicle becomes disabled, it is  
very important to tow it properly. Failure  
to do so can cause damage to the frame  
and body parts. Follow the instructions  
below to avoid damage.  
In the event that the vehicle cannot be  
reached to place the wrecker lift bar under  
the front axle, use the tow hooks in the  
front of the vehicle. The front tow hooks  
are used as a point at the front of the vehi-  
cle where the vehicle can be pulled.  
W8002767  
When the vehicle is located properly, lift  
the front and locate the lift bar under the  
front axle and secure. Using the front axle  
for towing minimizes the possibility for  
damage to the vehicle body, frame and sus-  
pension.  
NOTE! When the drive shaft or axle shafts  
are reinstalled, make sure the nuts are tight-  
ened to the correct torques. Also make sure  
the axle shafts are installed in the proper  
sides, with the left shaft in the left side and  
the right shaft in the right side.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Emergency Information 285  
Caging Spring Brake Chambers  
The parking spring brake chambers may be  
released mechanically if there is no com-  
pressed air available.  
Always start by chocking the wheels to  
prevent the vehicle from rolling. Chock-  
ing the wheels is important since you  
have to work under the vehicle. Failure  
to do so can result in unexpected vehicle  
movement and serious personal injury or  
death can occur.  
In the event of brake system failure,  
where the spring chambers are caged, the  
vehicle cannot be driven. There would  
be no means for stopping the vehicle  
and this could result in serious personal  
injury or death. Before caging the spring  
chambers, make the connection to a tow-  
ing vehicle or chock the wheels.  
Remove the plastic plug in the front end of  
the chamber. Remove the screw from the  
holder in the side of the brake chamber. In-  
sert the screw into the front hole and push  
in until it bottoms. Screw into the cylinder  
so at least 4 to 6 threads have entered.  
W5000643  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
286 Emergency Information  
Install the washer and nut. Tighten the nut.  
This compresses the brake chamber spring  
and releases the parking brake.  
Do not attempt in any way to disassem-  
ble or tamper with the spring brake  
chamber. If the force stored on the  
spring is suddenly released, it can cause  
serious personal injury or death.  
W5000644  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service Information 287  
Service Assistance and Manuals  
Your Volvo Truck dealer is trained and  
equipped to perform expert service on your  
Volvo vehicle. Your dealer has direct access  
to Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. for  
technical help, parts or service information.  
Delivery  
Assurance  
If you have a breakdown,  
VAS can arrange for load  
forwarding or equipment  
rental.  
Personal  
Trained staff for handling  
any vehicle problems.  
Assurance  
There is also a direct number to Volvo Ac-  
tion Service (VAS), staffed 24 hours a day,  
if you are in need of assistance. The num-  
ber to the Customer Support Center is:  
1 (800) 528–6586 [or (800) 52–VOLVO].  
Also on the internet:  
Uptime  
Assurance  
VAS will locate the near-  
est service provider and  
guarantee payment so  
you can get on the road  
as soon as possible.  
www.vas.volvo.com  
Price  
Assurance  
VAS audits service and  
parts billing to ensure  
guaranteed labor rates  
and preferred parts  
pricing for Volvo compo-  
nents.  
VAS can offer:  
There are also five regional offices that can  
give information and help. They are located  
in five cities around the US:  
Northeast Region - Philadelphia  
Ph. (610) 695-6940  
Fx. (610) 993-2881  
Southeast Region - Atlanta  
Ph. (770) 751-3120  
Fx. (770) 751-3149  
Midwest Region - Chicago  
Ph. (630) 734-4600  
Fx. (630) 734-3086  
Southwest Region - Dallas  
Ph. (972) 404-3100  
Fx. (972) 404-3125  
West Region - Salt Lake City  
Ph. (801) 352-6301  
Fx. (801) 352-6350  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
288 Service Information  
To order a single Service Manual or a Ser-  
vice Manual Set for your vehicle, you  
should contact your authorized Volvo Truck  
dealer or fax a request to the Volvo Truck  
North America, Inc. publications warehouse  
[Fax: (336) 668–3625]. They will help you  
locate the manual(s) you need.  
To be able to handle the order correctly,  
you must give the model, year and VIN  
(for VIN location, see page 16).  
Current prices for a Service Manual Set is  
$350.00 for vehicles with a Volvo engine  
and $300.00 for vehicles with a Cummins  
or Detroit Diesel (engine manuals have to  
be ordered separately from the manufac-  
turer). If complete wiring schematics are  
needed, they can be ordered for $150.00.  
Billing will be done through the nearest  
Volvo Truck dealer.  
NOTE! Prices subject to change without  
notice. Please allow 30 days for delivery.  
Name  
Company  
Address  
CSZ (Province, Postal Code)  
Vehicle Model  
Model Year  
Item 1:  
Phone/Fax  
VIN  
Item 2:  
Item 3:  
Item 4:  
Item 5:  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index 289  
Index  
Collision Warning System, VO-  
A
RAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Comfort Clip . . . . . . . . . 54  
Communication and Entertainment187  
Coolant Temperature Gauge . . . 69  
Cruise Control . . . . . . . . 218  
ABS Telltale . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Acknowledge Information and Stop  
Messages . . . . . . . . . . 124  
Additional Safety Features . . . 46  
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . 168  
Air Filters, Cab . . . . . . . 178  
Air Suspension Gauge . . . . . 84  
Air Suspension Telltale . . . . . 82  
Air Tanks . . . . . . . . . . 234  
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Alternator . . . . . . . . . . 245  
Antenna Multiplexer . . . . . 187  
Antennas . . . . . . . . . . 187  
Antilock Braking System (ABS) 236  
Auxiliary Lift Axle(s) . . . . . 260  
Auxiliary Switches . . . . . . 106  
Axles and Wheels . . . . . . 258  
D
Daily Maintenance Checks . . . 41  
Dash Overview . . . . . . . . 64  
Daytime Running Lights . . . . 98  
Diff. Lock Switch . . . . . . 104  
Diff. Lock Telltale . . . . . . . 80  
Differential Locks . . . . . . 258  
Display Menu: Data Log Mode 146  
Display Menu: Faults? . . . . 164  
Display Menu: Fuel Economy . 157  
Display Menu: Gauge . . . . . 153  
Display Menu: Password Input . 152  
Display Menu: Set-Up Mode  
.
126  
B
Display Menu: System Diagnostic 131  
Display Menu: Time/Distance . 159  
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Door Operation . . . . . . . . 20  
Downhill Operation . . . . . . 216  
Drive Axle Oil Temperature Gauge 83  
Driving Light Switch . . . . . . 99  
Battery Jump Start . . . . . . 247  
Battery Protection System . . . 252  
Blind Spots . . . . . . . . . .  
Bobtail Operation . . . . . . .  
3
4
Brake Application Gauge . . . . 84  
Brake System Air Pressure Gauge 85  
Brake System Controls . . . . 226  
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . 223  
Brakes, General . . . . . . . 224  
E
Electrical Center . . . . . . . 253  
Electrical Power Studs . . . . 255  
Electrical System . . . . . . . 244  
Emergency Information . . . . 282  
C
C-Brake . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
Cab Entry . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Cab Interior . . . . . . . . . 184  
Caging Spring Brakes . . . . . 285  
Emissions Control Compliance . .  
8
Engine Brake . . . . . . . . 101  
Engine Break-In . . . . . . . 210  
Engine Cold Start, Volvo . . . 202  
Engine Idling . . . . . . . . 213  
Engine Jump Start . . . . . . 248  
Engine Operation . . . . . . . 209  
Engine Overspeed . . . . . . 212  
Canadian Consumer Complaints .  
6
CB-Radio . . . . . . . . . . 189  
Change Bulbs In Instrument . . . 89  
Clutch and Transmission . . . 222  
Clutch Operation . . . . . . . 222  
Cold Weather Operation . . . . 205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
290 Index  
Engine Serial Number Location,  
Heated Mirror Switch . . . . . 103  
Heating and Air Conditioning . 168  
Hi Beam Telltale . . . . . . . . 81  
Hi/Lo Beam Switch . . . . . . 91  
High Altitude Operation . . . . 217  
Hood Opening . . . . . . . . . 26  
Horns . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
Volvo Engine . . . . . . . . . 18  
Engine Shut-Down System . . 211  
Engine Start and Operation . . 197  
Engine Start Procedure . . . . 197  
Engine Stopping . . . . . . . 200  
Entering Behind Cab . . . . . . 24  
Entering the Cab . . . . . . . . 23  
Ether Start . . . . . . . . . . 204  
Exhaust Brake . . . . . . . . 101  
I
Idle Adjustment . . . . . . . 214  
Idle Shutdown . . . . . . . . 215  
Idling . . . . . . . . . . . . 213  
Ignition Switch . . . . . . . . 201  
INFO Telltale . . . . . . . . . 73  
Info Telltale . . . . . . . . . 113  
Information and Stop Messages 112  
Inspecting Safety Belts . . . . . 49  
Instrument Cluster, Left Overview 68  
Instrument Light Dimmer . . . 107  
Instruments and Controls . . . . 64  
Instruments, Overview . . . . . 64  
Interior lights . . . . . . . . 184  
F
Fastening Safety Belt . . . . . . 48  
Fifth Wheel Instructions . . . . 264  
Fifth Wheel Lock Telltale . . . . 80  
Fifth Wheel Slider . . . . . . 267  
Fifth Wheel Slider Operation  
.
280  
Fifth Wheel Unlocking . . . . 268  
Fifth Wheel, General . . . . . 264  
Fog light Switch . . . . . . . . 99  
Foot Brake . . . . . . . . . 226  
Frame Alterations . . . . . . .  
7
Fuel Economy Driving . . . . 190  
Fuel Level Gauge . . . . . . . 84  
Fuel Tank Caps . . . . . . . 220  
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . 221  
J
Jake-Brake . . . . . . . . . 101  
Jump Start . . . . . . . . . . 247  
Jump Starting Engine . . . . . 248  
G
L
Gauge, Air Suspension Pressure . 84  
Gauge, Brake Application Pressure 84  
Gauge, Brake System Air Pressure 85  
Gauge, Coolant Temperature . . . 69  
Gauge, Drive Axle Oil Temperature83  
Gauge, Fuel Level . . . . . . . 84  
Gauge, Oil Pressure . . . . . . 70  
Gauge, Pyrometer . . . . . . . 68  
Gauge, Turbo Boost Pressure . . 71  
Lights, Daytime Running . . . . 98  
M
Main Instrument, Overview . . . 76  
Marker Interrupt Switch . . . . 100  
Master Warning Telltale . . . . . 78  
Mirror Defrost Telltale . . . . . 82  
N
O
National Standard Seat . . . . 181  
No Charge Telltale . . . . . . . 75  
Noise Emissions . . . . . . . . 13  
General Information . . . . . .  
1
Graphic Display . . . . . . . 108  
Graphic Display Controls . . . 109  
Graphic Display Overview . . 108  
Graphic Display Telltales . . . 111  
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
Oil Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . 70  
Overload . . . . . . . . . . .  
Owner Information, General . . .  
Owner’s Information Package . .  
5
1
2
H
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . 98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index 291  
SRS Airbag . . . . . . . . . . 55  
P
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . 229  
Parking Brake Telltale . . . . . 81  
Parking Spring Brake . . . . . 232  
Power Outlets, 12 V . . . . . 255  
Power Steering . . . . . . . . 256  
Power Steering, General . . . . 256  
Power Studs . . . . . . . . . 255  
Pre-Trip Inspection and Daily  
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Preheater Telltale . . . . . . . . 72  
Pressure Gauge, Oil . . . . . . 70  
Pressure Gauge, Turbo Boost . . 71  
PTO Speed Adjustment . . . . . 97  
Pyrometer Gauge . . . . . . . . 68  
Steering Column, Adjustable  
.
257  
Stereo . . . . . . . . . . . . 188  
Stop Engine Telltale . . . . . . 74  
Stop Telltale . . . . . . . . . 120  
Suspension Level Switch . . . 105  
Switches, Left Cluster . . . . . 94  
Switches, Optional . . . . . . 106  
Switches, Pneumatic . . . . . 104  
Switches, Right Cluster . . . . 100  
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . 76  
Tag Axle(s) . . . . . . . . . 260  
TCS Switch . . . . . . . . . 100  
TCS Telltale . . . . . . . . . . 87  
Telephone . . . . . . . . . . 189  
Telltale Bulb, Replacing . . . . . 89  
Telltale Overview . . . . . . . 66  
Telltale, 5th Wheel Lock . . . . 80  
Telltale, ABS . . . . . . . . . 82  
Telltale, Air Suspension . . . . . 82  
Telltale, Auto Neutral . . . . . . 88  
Telltale, Check Transmission . . 86  
Telltale, Diff. Lock . . . . . . . 80  
Telltale, Hi Beam . . . . . . . 81  
Telltale, INFO . . . . . . . . . 73  
Telltale, Master Warning . . . . 78  
Telltale, Mirror Defrost . . . . . 82  
Telltale, No Charge . . . . . . . 75  
Telltale, Parking Brake . . . . . 81  
Telltale, Preheater . . . . . . . 72  
Telltale, Safety Belt . . . . . . 81  
Telltale, Stop Engine . . . . . . 74  
Telltale, TCS . . . . . . . . . 87  
Telltale, Transmission Temperature 86  
Temperature Gauge, Coolant . . . 69  
Tire Inflation . . . . . . . . . 262  
R
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . 188  
Raise Hood . . . . . . . . . . 26  
Rear Axle Serial Number Loca-  
tions, Volvo . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Road Relay . . . . . . . . . 189  
Roadside Assistance . . . . . 287  
S
Safety Belt Replacement . . . . 53  
Safety Belt Telltale . . . . . . . 81  
Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . .  
6
Safety Equipment . . . . . . . 62  
Safety Guidelines, Electrical Sys-  
tem . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244  
Safety Guidelines, Fifth Wheel . 265  
Safety Information, Brakes . . 223  
Seat, National . . . . . . . . 181  
Seat, Stationary . . . . . . . 183  
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 180  
Selling Vehicle . . . . . . . . .  
1
Service Assistance . . . . . . 287  
Service Information . . . . . . 287  
Service Manuals . . . . . . . 288  
Sliding 5th Wheel Switch . . . 105  
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . 77  
Spring Brake Chambers, Caging 285  
Towing Information, General  
.
282  
Towing Procedures . . . . . . 284  
Traction Control System (TCS) 238  
Trailer Brake Hand Control . . 234  
Trailer Coupling Procedures . . 270  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
292 Index  
Trailer Supply Valve . . . . . 229  
Trailer Uncoupling . . . . . . 275  
Transmission Retarder . . . . 243  
Turbo Boost Pressure Gauge . . . 71  
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . 91  
VORAD Collision Warning System63  
W
Warning, temperature transmission  
oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
Welding On Frame . . . . . . .  
Welding Precautions . . . . . .  
7
7
U
Uphill Operation . . . . . . . 216  
Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . 263  
Wheel Nuts . . . . . . . . . 261  
Windshield Washer Capacity . . . 43  
Windshield Washers . . . . . . 92  
Winterfront . . . . . . . . . 208  
Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . 92  
V
Vehicle Access . . . . . . . . . 19  
Vendor Component Information  
.
1
Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . 119  
Volvo Action Service . . . . . 287  
Volvo Standard Seat . . . . . 182  
Volvo Trucks North America Con-  
tacts . . . . . . . . . . . . 287  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VHD Technical and Parts Support Group  
If you need technical assistance, the group for  
technical and parts support is available 24 hours  
per day, 7 days per week at 1-877-978-6586.  
This assistance is available to assist you with  
solving technical issues and parts issues  
regarding the Volvo Heavy Duty (VHD) model  
vehicle. A trained Volvo VHD Specialist for  
Technical and Parts Support will give you the  
assistance you need to resolve your problem.  
1-877-97-VOLVO  
VOLVO Action Service (VAS)  
Support Center  
If you should require breakdown assistance and  
need to contact facilities for towing or repair,  
the VAS support center is available 24 hours per  
day, 7 days per week at 1-800-528-6586. A Volvo  
Customer Support Specialist will answer your  
questions or arrange for the assistance you need.  
1-800-52-VOLVO  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Volvo Trucks North America, Inc.  
P.O. Box 26115, Greensboro, NC 27402-6115  
Volvo Trucks Canada, Inc.  
6490 Vipond Drive, Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1W8  
http://www.volvotrucks.volvo.com  
Volvo Trucks North America, Inc. 2000  
PV776-TSP20 139484  
Publication Date - 8/2000  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Teledex Telephone A100 User Manual
Therma Stor Products Group Dehumidifier Phoenix 200 HT User Manual
Timex Watch 333 095002 User Manual
Toshiba Network Card MK4018GAS User Manual
Toshiba Security Camera CS3910BH User Manual
Trane Marine Sanitation System BAS SVU23B EN User Manual
Transition Networks Network Card CFETF1011 205 User Manual
Tricity Bendix Cooktop SIE556 User Manual
Uniflame Charcoal Grill CBT802W User Manual
Wagan Refrigerator 2083 User Manual